Kae) ee SE (2 MuseUM ig VOL. 78 JULY 1955 \ oe OF Woe, “a iq “a S ; gr ba - TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED ADELAIDE PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide for transmission by post as a periodical SE ee ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED OFFICERS FOR 1954-1955 Patron HIS EXCELLENCY AIR VICE-MARSHAL SIR ROBERT GEORGE K.B.E., C.B., M.C. President R. V. SOUTHCOTT, M.B., B.S. Vice-Presidents J. K. TAYLOR, B.A., M.Sc., B.Ag.Sc. S. B. DICKINSON, M.Sc. Secretary Treasurer L. W. PARKIN, M.Sc. H. M. HALE Editor I. G. SYMONS ’ Librarian Programme Secretary N. B. TINDALE, B.Sc. T. D. SCOTT, B.Sc. Members of Council D. C. SWAN, M.Sc. S. J. EDMONDS, B.A., M.Sc. C. M. DELAND, M.B., B.S. Cc. G. STEPHENS, D.Sc. A. R. ALDERMAN, Ph.D., D.Sc., F.G.S. T. R. N. LOTHIAN, N.D.H. (N.Z.) Auditors F. M. ANGEL N. S. ANGEL SOME PARASITES OF AUSTRALIAN VERTEBRATES. BY PATRICIA M. MAWSON* Summary Four nematodes from marsupials are described as new species, Labiostrongylus kungi from Macropus major, Spirostrongylus kartana from Thylogale eugenii, Phascolostrongylus stirtoni and Macropostrongylus lasiorhini from Lasiorhinus latifrons; other species recorded are Pharyngostrongylus alpha Johnston and Mawson (Macropus major), Diplotriaena alpha Johnston and Mawson (Calamanthus fuliginosus), Streptocara recta (Linst.) (Podiceps novaehollandiae) and Physaloptera bancrofti Irwin Smith and Ophidascaris filaria (Duj.) (Aspidites melanocephalus). Pharyngostrongylus parma Johnston and Mawson and P. gallardi Johnston and Mawson are both referred to genus Spirostrongylus Yorke and Maplestone, and a key to species of this genus is given. 1 S0ME PARASITES OF AUSTRALIAN VERTEBRATES By Pateicra M. Mawson “ [Read 8 April 1954] SUMMARY Four nematodes from inarsupials are described as new species, Labiostrangylus kimngt from Muacropus major, Spirostrongylus Rarioma from Thylogale eugemi, Phascolostrongylus stirtoni and Macropostrongylus lastorhini from Lasiorhinus lattfrons; other species recorded are Phuryngostrongsiius alfha Johnston and Mawson (Macropus major), Diplotriagna alpha Johnston and Mawson (Calamanthus fuliginosus), Strepiocara recia (Linst.) (Podiceps novae- hollandiae) and Physaloptera bancrofi Trewin Smith and Ophidascaris flaria (Duj.) (Aspidites melanocephalus).. Pharyngostrongylus, parma Johnston and Mawson and P. gallurdi Johnston and Mawson are both referred to genus Spirastrangylus Yorke and Maplestone, and a key to species of this gerus is given. LIST OF PARASITES List of parasites examined, arranged under their hosts: Aspidites melanocephdlus (Krefft), Ophidascaris filaria (Duj.), Physaloptera bancrofti Jrwin-Smith (Queensland). Calamanthus fuliginosus Vig, and Horst, Diplotriaena alpha J. and M. (South Australia). Podiceps ruficollis Vroeg, Streptocara recta (Linst.) (Sotith Australia), Macropus mujor Shaw, Labiostrongylus kungt n.sp., Pharyngostrongylus alpha J- and M., (New South Wales), Lusioritinus latifrons (Owen), Phascolostrongylus stirtoni nu, sp., Macropo- strongylus lasiorhint n.sp., (South Australia). sh ill Per. and Less, Spirosirongylus kartoya n. sp. (Kangaroo sland). ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The nematodes reported on in this paper were sent fot examination by yarious people. Professor Stirton, a visitor to South Australia from Berkeley University, California, U.S.A., collected and dissected the wombats from which two new species of Strongyle worms were taken; Dr, Flecker of the Queensland Naturalists’ Club sent the stomach of Aspidites melanocephalus, The material from Macropus major was sent for identification by the Director of the New South Wales Department of Agriculture Veterinary Research Station at Glen- field, New South Wales; the worms from the wren Calamanthus fuliginosus were collected by S, J, Edmonds of this Department. I am indebted to these collectors for opportunities they have provided for the examination of interesting tnaterial, PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS ALPHA Johnston and Mawson Fig, 1-2 Several specimens of this species were prescnit in material from the kangaroo (Macropus major) from New South Wales. Pharyngostrongylus alpha is appar- ently very common in the red and grey kangaroo. The present material comprises rather larger worms than have hitherto been recorded, and the length of the spicule and of the female tail is greater. The males are up to 10:2 mm., the females to 11:2 mm. in length; the spicules are 1*7 mm. long, 1/5*7 of the body length; the female tail is 0-48 mm. long, and the vulva 0-15 mm. in front of this. Eggs in the vagina are 0:14 mm, by 0-08 mm, Earlier descriptions state that the labial papillae are without setae; however, in some specimens a pair of very small setae are present on the sub- median. papillae. “Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, 2 The genus Sprrostroncyius Yorke and Maplestone 1926 The genus Spirostrangylus was erected by Yorke and Maplestone 1926 {p. 68) for a species of worm found in a wallaby. The exact location of the worm in the animal was not indicated by them; the worms however were dis- tinctive among Trichoneminae from marsupials in being “spirally rolled.” Since then two other species with a similar habit, and closely resembling Spirostrongylus in other features, have been described from the oesophagus of wallabies; these were both referred, probably ertoneotsly, to the genus Pharyagostrongylus, as P, para Johnston and Mawson 1939, and P, gallardt Johnston and Mawson 1942. A species with similar habitat and habit, is described below, The earlier species were kept distinct from the genus Sypirastrongylics mainly because of the absence of a leaf crown. En face examination of the species described below shows that there are numerous very small chitinows projections from the anterior end of the buccal cavity, and these may well be present in the other species; they are so small that they would not he seen in other than en face view. Apart from the small size or possible absence of the leaf crown, the four species are very similar, It is now suggested that the following species belong to the genus S, spirestrengylus Yorke atul Maplestone, S. parma Johnston and Mawson, S. gallavdi Johnston and Mawson, and S, kartuna n. sp, A key to the species has heen prepared. 1. Vestibule Jonger than 40, ium, ety ee aS gtane 2 Vestibule shorter than 35y, 100 we ae eee ee 3 2. Vestibute 70, long; female tail 50), lon, wee ee Raertana Tsp. Vestibule 45, long; female tail 230,.Jong .. —. ... $. gallardi J. & M. 3. Vestibule 14, long; with very thick walls 2.0 0 400 a. Ss parma J. & M. Vestifile 25-27, long, walls not thick. 9 wa. eee, spirosirangylus V. & M, Spirostrongylus kartana n. sp. Fig. 3-6 Numerous small coiled worms were taken from the oesophagus of Thylogals eugenii from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, The males. were up to 8 mm. and the females to 9 mm. in Jength, and both sexes were tightly coiled into a spiral, both in life and death. The cuticle is distinctly annulated. The setiform cervical papillae lie about 80 behind the anterior end. The anterior end bears a ctitictlar roll on which are four rounded submedian papillae and two small lateral papillae. ‘The buccal cavity is short, and leads to a vestibule (which may be homvlogous with buccal capsule) with strongly annulated walls, which are thickest near the mouth, and narrow gradually towards the base. The cavity of this vestibule is of even diameter, and is 94 wide by 60u long. The oesophagus is 0°65-0°75 mm, long, with the anterior two-thirds widening gradually, ending in @ sudden constriction followed by a large bulb. The nerve ring lies at the level of the constriction, and the excretory pore is at this level or just behind it, The female tail is 50 long, very short and pointed. Immediately in front of it is the vulva, 110, in front of the posterior end of the body. The eggs are 140 x 70. The spicules are 0°85-0-95 mm, kong, alate, with simple tips. A heart- shaped gubetnaculum is present. The bursa is not deeply lobed and bears no internal papillae. Only the dorsal ray reaches the edge of the bursa. The ventral rays lie together; the ventro-lateral ray is divergent form ithe medio- and postero-lateral, and the externodorsal which rises from the same root as the laterals is divergent from them. The dorsal ray is cleft nearly to its base, and each of the widely divergent branches reaches the bursal edye, giving off a shart lateral branch at about two-thirds of its length. . The species is very like S, gallard? Johnston and Mawson, differing chiefly in the length of the vestibule and of the female tatl- 3 Labiostrongylus kungi n. sp, Fig. 7-9 A new species of the genus Labiostrongylus was taken from Macropus major in New South Wales. The species is very close to L. longispicularis Wood, which apparently is common in kangaroos from all parts of Australia, but differs in the form of the dorsal ray of the bursa and in the spicule length. The name L. kungi has been given in recognition of the work done on the genus by Kung, Fig. 1-9 Fig, 1-2, Pharyngostrongylus alpha—i, head; 2, female tail. Fig. 3-6, Spirosirongylus kartana—3, head; 4, oesophageal region; 5, female tail; 6, bursa. Fig. 7-9, Labio- strongylus kungi—7, head; 8, en face view of head; 9, part of bursa. Fig. 5 and 7 to same scale. The males are up to 48 mm, in length, the females to 60 mm. The cuticle is firmly annulated; a pair of small threadlike cervical “papillae” lie 0-7 - 0-8 mm. from the anterior end, There are six lips, the two lateral shorter than the sub- median; the lateral labial papillae are rounded and lie near the apex of the lips; 4 the submedian papillae are selifurm and lie at about mid-lengti on the lips, The buccal capsule is deep, O15 mm. long by O11 mm. internal diameter, 0-15 mm. external diameter. The oesophagus is long, about quarter of the body length in the male; it is almost cylindrical, and the base is sur- routided by a fold of “glandular” tissue. The nerve ring was not clearly discerned but is thought to lie at one-third of the oesophageal length from the head, The excretory pore was not seen, The feniale tai! is 1-6 mm. long; the vulva is 3-2 mm, from the tip of the tail, Ripe eggs were not seen. The bursa of the male is very like that of L. australis Kung, differing only very slightly in the form of the dorsal ray ( fig. 9). The genital cone is distinct, and bears two bifid accessory processes. The spicules are 52-60 mm. long, one-sixth to one- ninth of the body length. Macropostrongylus lasiorhini n. sp. Fig, 10-15 An apparently new species of the genus Macropostrongylus was taken from Lasiarhixus latifrons from near Blanchetown, South Australia. Both males and females were present, the males up to 1-5 mm. in length, the females to 2°0 mm. The cuticle is distinctly annulated, The lips are not distinct but there is a definite labial roll of tissue bearing the cephalic papillae, at the anterior end, Shortly behind this the body is constricted at the level of the hinder part of the buccal capsule, and from there widens rapidly to the hase of the oesophagus, then more gradually to the middle region of the body, followed by a gradual narrowing to the tail. In the fetnale the body narrows abruptly shortly in front of the anus, and ends in a short pointed tail, There are six eushion-like cephalic papillae, each with a yery short anteriorly directed seta. The buccal capsule narrows posteriorly, the anterior diameter being 32 including the walls, the posterior 254; the depth of the base from the mouth is 50 to 55u. The walls are thicker posteriorly, There are four strong tooth-like clements arising from the inner walls of the buccal capsule, two arising from the anterior end, two from abour the mil-length. In en face view they are seen to be in submedian positions, the two subdorsal directed slightly towards one another, he two subventral similarly arranged. These are considered ta he the elements of the internal leaf crawn which is characteristic af the genus but which in this species are fewer in number and more heavily chitinized than usual, The ocsophagns is 1-1+1 mm. long in the male, 1+1-1-2 mm. in the female; the anterior third is cylindrical, surrounded near its base by the nerve ring; posterior ta this the oesophagus widens greatly, to nearly five times its diameter al the nerve ring. The excretory pore lies just behind the nerve ring. In the female the conical tail is short and pointed, 0-1 mm. long. The vulva is 0'12 mm. in front of the ants, The eggs are about 150 hy 60p, The alate spicules are 1-0 mm, long. A pair of curved gubernacular plates, 0-2 nun. long, are present The bursa has distinct dorsal and lateral lobes, and the two ventral lobes are nol separated. The ventral rays are cleft near their tips and reach nearly to the edge of the bursa, The dorso- and medio-lateral tays lie toyether for their entire length, the anterolateral is separate [rom them and not quite so long; the externodorsal arises from the dorsal and is short. The dorsal bifureates at about mid-length each branch hifurcating at half its length forming two terminal branches, of which the outer may be equal to or slightly longer than the inner and neither of which reach the outer edyre. The species is very close tu M. baylist Wood. The main differences fie in the proportions of the buccal capsule which is relatively deeper in the species from the wombat, and in the shape of the head and of the cephalic papillae. The female is longer, The spicule is longer in the species from the wombat; Wood describes four large and “a number” of smaller elements of the leaf crown, Ju the present species only the tour larger elements are present, anil of these only two arise from the mid-length of the walls of the tmccal capsule. 5 Phascolostrongylus stirtoni n. sp. Fig. 16-18 Only two female worms, an apparently new species belonging to the genus Phascolostrongylus, were collected from Lasiorhinus latifrons, and of these one only is entire. This reaches a length of 16 mm. They closely resemble P, tyrleyt Canavan but differ in certain features. The trivial name of the new species is given in recognition of the collector, Professor Stirton. Fig. 10-19 Fig. 10-15, Macropostrongylus lasiorhini—10, head; 11, en face view of head; 12, oesophageal region; 13, female tail; 14, lateral view of bursa; 15, dorsal and externo- dorsal rays. Fig. 16-18—Phascolostrongyvlus sttriont—l6, head; 17, oesophageal region; 18, female tail; Fig. 19, Streptocara recta—male tail, Fig. 10 and 12 to same scale, Fig. 12, 13, 14, 15 and 17 to same scale. 6 The cuticle is distinctly annulated throughout the body. There is a pair of clongale lateral “‘cetvical” papillae lying a short distance posterior to the oeso- phous. The cephalic papillae are six in number, the four submedian segmented, t each composed of two. segments instead of three as described by Canavan. Canayan’s figure is of two-partite papillae; possibly he considered the pulp, or nerve tissue, which passes forwards into the papiita, as a third segment. ‘The part projecting beyond the lips is 10 in length (24 p in P. turleyt), The buccal capsule is cylindrical rather than barrel-shaped. The eight leaf crown elements arise from the top of the buccal capsule. The oesophagus is 0-6 mm. long, slightly constricted where it is stittoutided by the nerve ring, at 0°32 mum. from the mouth, and behind this widening slightly. The exerctory pore is at the level of the posterior end of the ocsophagus, not at mid-oesophagus as described for P. tirle yt, The body narrows abruptly a short distance in front of the vulva, and the tail is short and conical, The anus 1s :0°15 mm,, and the vulva 0-3 mm, from the tip of the tail, The posterior lips of both the anus and the vulva ate erllarged. An egg in the vagina is 84a x 39 p. PiysaLorrera BANCROFTI Irwin-Smith Several worms, both males and females, lrom Alspidiles nielanocephalus from Cairns, Queensland, proved to be Physaloptera bancrofti, This species, originally described in 1922 from a lizard, (rymnedactylus platurus Shaw, from Narrabeen, Sydney, bas not been recorded since then. The specimens from the snake are almost identical in size and proportions of parts of the hody, arrangement of teeth on lips, and arrangement of bursal papillae, with the descriptions and figures given by Miss Irwin-Smith, STREPTOCARA RECTA (Linst.) Fig, 19 Several specimens of Stveflocara recta were taken from Podiceps ruficallis, from Meadows, South Australia, Both males and females are preset, the males to 42 nim. long, the females to 5°5 tm, The measurements generally agree with those described by Yatnaguti 1935. The main difference is in the position of the vulva which In the present specimens lies tearer to the middle of the hody, dividing it in ratio 5:4, The vestibule in the male is 23 long, 13 in diameter dorsoventrally and 6p laterally The cervical papillae in most specimens are quincuspid; in the males the central cusp is shorter than the others, in most female specimens all cusps ate of equal length except in two cases; in one specimen the second and fourth cusps of both cervical papillae are elongate and bifid, and in another the central cusp of one cervical papillae only is similarly developed. in the male the proximal ends of both spicules are greatly enlarged and the distal end of both are “barbed,” that of the longer spicule being somewhat com- plex and twisted givisiy perhaps the corkscrew appearance commiented on by Mueller, The post-anal papillae are not arranged in two separate groups as figured by Mueller. A figure of the male tail is given. The anterior end has been sgured ial and Mawson in an eatlicr publication (Johnston and Mawson O41, 258). OPHIDASCARIS FILARIA (Dujardin) This common parasite of snakes is now recorded from Aspidites melano- cephalus from Cairns, Queensland. DTPLOTRIAENA ALPHA Johnston and Mawson _ A male and a female worm were taken from a field wren Culamanthus fuli- ginosns, by Mr. 5, J, Edmonds near Keith, South Australia. 7 The male is 53 mm. long, 0-45 mm. maximum breadth, the female 75 mm. long, 0-6 mm, maximum breadth. The head bears four large papillae in sub- median positions and a pair of very small lateral papillae (?amphids). The tridents are 0-1 mm. long in the male, 0-11 mm. in the female. The anterior part of the oesophagus is 0-35 mm, long in the male, 0°5 mm. in the female, and the total length of the oesophagus is 2°4 and 3-1 mm. in the female respectively. The nerve ring surrounds the anterior oesophagus at about its mid-length or a little behind this. The vulva lics shortly behind the end of the anterior oesophagus, 0-6 mm. from the head. The eggs are 26-31 » by 45 p. The male tail is so clear that the spicules and papillae are hardly discernible. The longer spicule is 0-9 mm. D, alpha was described from two female specimens. The only significant difference from these shown by the female from the wren is in the much shorter length of the posterior part of the oesophagus. LITERATURE Canavan, W. P. 1931 Nematode parasites of vertebrates in the Philadelphia Zoological Gardens and vicinity; ii. Parasitol, 23, 196-228 Irwin-SmitH, V. 1922 Notes on the nematode genus Physaloptera, pt. iv. The Physaloptera of Australian lizards (cont.), Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S,W,, 47, (4), 415-427 Jonnston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1938 Strongyle nematodes from Central Austra- lian kangaroos and wallabies. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62, (2), 263-286 Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P, M. 1939 Strongyle nematodes from marsupials in New South Wales. Proc. Linn Soc. N.S.W., 64, 513-536 Jounsron, T, H,, and Mawson, P, M, 1940 Some flarial parasites of Australian ‘birds. Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust. 64, (2), 355-361 Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P.M. 1942 The Gallard collection of parasitic nema- todes in the Australian Museum. Rec. Aust. Museum, 21, (2), 110-115 Kung, C, C. 1948 Some new nematodes from the Australian wallahy (Macropus rufogrisea fruticus) with a note on the synonymy of genera Zoniolaimus, Labiostrongylus and Buccostrongylus. Jour. Helm., 22, (2); 93-108 Woon, W. A. 1929 Some parasitic nematodes from Western Atstralia. Rep. Dir. Inst. Animal Path., Cambridge, (1929) 1930, 205-214 Yamacutt, S., 1935 Studies on the helminth fauna of Japan, pt. xii, Ayian nematodes. I, Jap. J. Zool., 6 (2), 403-431 Yorke, W., and Marrestone, P, A, 1926 The nematode parasites of vertebrates, London THE STRATIGRAPHIC SUCCESSION IN THE VICINITY OF MT. BABBAGE STATION, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY G. D. WOODARD Summary Boulder-bearing grits in the vicinity of Muloowurtina Station, previously regarded as glacial deposits of Cretaceous (Winton) age, are lacustrine deposits in which many of the boulders are erratics derived from the Sturt Tillite. The presence of an upper Gondwana flora in these sediments and their conformable relationships with the overlying Aptian marine shales places them within the lower Cretaceous System. Correlation of these sediments has been made with the Blythesdale Sandstones (late Neocomian - early Aptian). The generally coarse clastic nature of the sediments, pronounced current bedding, and ripple marking of the lower grits give evidence in support of torrential stream accumulation into a lacustrine environment. The Mt. Babbage and adjacent sections, previously described as early Tertiary (Eyrian) have been, on floral and lithological evidence, grouped as lower Cretaceous (Neocomian). These dominantly arenaceous sediments are overlain by fossiliferous marine clays of lower Cretaceous (Aptian) age, capped by a resistant siliceous Duricrust. Over the whole area a later deposit of piedmont gravels has been developed obscuring much of the outcrop of earlier sediments. Tentative regional correlation of the Mesozoic deposits of Mt. Babbage has been made with strata of a similar nature at Billy Springs, Copley and west of the Flinders Range. THE STRATIGRAPHIC SUCCESSION IN THE VICINITY OF MT. BABBAGE STATION, SOUTH AUSTRALIA By G. D. Wooparn [Read 8 April 1954| SUMMARY Boulder-bearing grits in’ the vicinily of Muloowurtina Station, previously regarded as glacial deposits of Cretuceous (Winton) age, are lacustrine deposits in which many of the boulders are erratics derived from the Sturt Tillite. The presence of an upper Gondwana fora in these sediments and their conformable relationships with the over- lying Aptian marine shales places them within the lower Cretaceous System, Correla- tion of these sediments has been made with the Blythesdale Sundstones (late Neocomiait -carly Aptian). The generally coarse clastic nature of the sediments, pronounced current bedding, and ripple marking of the lower grits give evidence in support of forretitial stream accumulation into a lacustrine environment, The Mt. Babbage and adjacerit sections, previously described as early Tertiary ane have been, on floral and lithological evidence, grouped as lower Cretaceous Neocomian). These dominantly arenaceous sediments are overlain by fossiliferous marine clays of lower Cretaceous (Aptian) age, capped by a resistant siliceous Duri- crust. Over the whole area a later deposit of piedmont gravels has been developed obscuring much of the outcrop of earlier sediments. Tentative regional correlation of the Mesozoic deposits of Mt, Babbage has been made with strata of a similar nature at Billy Springs, Copley and west of the Flinders Range. I. INTRODUCTION Previous field investigations within this area have largely been confined to the metamorphic Precambrian Complex. W. G. Woolnough (1924) prepared a preliminary note on the occurrence of glacial erratics in the Muloowurtina area, but did not refer to the Mesozoic aspect of the associated Aora or the marine nature of the overlying Lower Cretaceous sediments. A further paper prepared in association with Sir T. W. E. David (1926) discussed in further detail the occurrence of glacial erratics and the stratigraphic succession of this area. Sprigg (1951) referred to the Mount Babbage section but was unable to visit the localities. Bowes (1952) similarly referred to the sediments of this locality as belonging to the Eyrian series, The Mesozoic age of the Mt. Babbage sediments was first recognized by O. A. Jones, wha determined the presence of Ofozomites and other associated flora in specimens collected by S. B, Dickinson during the detailed napping of the area. Figetp Work Field studies of the Muloowurtina arca were made by the writer during September 1953. ‘The work included field recormaissance, measuring aryl describ- ing stratigraphic sections and the collection of representative fossils and samples of the section units. U. GEOLOGY AND PHYSIOGRAPITY ‘The area under consideration is located withm the vicinity of Muloowurtina Homestead, situated in latitude 29° 58’ south, longitude 139° 44’ east, 150 miles east of Copley, South Australia. The most marked physiographic feature of the area is the Flinders Ranges which consist of metamorphosed Precambrian sedi- metits which have been faulted and subsequently dissected to form a high moun- tain range between 2,000 and 3,000 feet in height. Jn the vicinity of Muloo- wurtina the range has a marked linear esearpmenr trending roughly north-east and south-west, 9 Bordering the eastern slope of the range, a series of foothills of steeply dipping lower Cretaceous (Aptian) sediments consisting of fossiliferous blue- grey, yellow, and white gypsiferous clays and silty sands with a grey Duricrust capping, rises to a height of approximately 350 feet above the level of the eastern plains, High residuals of these Cretaceotis beds form extensive tableland forma- tions over much of the area north of the homestead, the beds, which are here fossiliferous, dipping gently to the east at approximately 3°. Adjacent to and overlying unconformably the Precambrian racks is a series of cross-bedded and laminated intercalated grits, sands and carbonaceous clays which dip at 2°, N.70° E., below the marine Cretaceous beds. Within these grits are occasional faceted boulders which have been regarded previously (David and Woolnongh, 1926) as glacial in origin, These boulder heds, together with the underlying clastic and carbonaceous sediments, have been examined principally fram a series of shallow clif exposures: 1, Approximately two miles north-west of Mutoowurtina homestead, 2, In the cliffs of Hamilton Creek from Terrapinna waterhole to south of the woolshed, + mile west of the homestead, 3, From the fossil wood locality described in detail by Woolnough and David, 24 miles south of Muloowurtina, The boulders whose origitt has previously been regarded as glacial consist of a heterogeneous assortment of medium and coarse-grained quartz felspar porphyries, quartzite, quartz, slate, schists, ete., up to five feet in length, which are scattered, alone with smaller tounded pebbles, in abundance over these areas. Some of the boulders exhibit well-defined planes of faceting, others are well rounded of irregular in shape. No glacial striae have been observed on the stirface of the boulders though effects of fluviatile wear are generally well marked. The boulders in all three regions which were examined, either overlie, or are set in a coarse gritty heterogeneous sandstone of which the grains are sub-angular and dominantly quartzite in composition. In the most southerly examined locality, 24 miles from Mulocwurtina, the dark brownish-yellow sandstone in which the boulders occur dips gently io the eust at an angle of 11°, strike 330°, Gentle folding giving dips of approximately 3° has occurred in the vicinity of the wool- shed. North of Terrapinna waterhoie, micaceous sandstones, quartzites and ferru- ginous grits have been examined where they form high tablelands in the vicinity of Mount Babbage, These sediments, formerly regarded as Lower Tertiary (Eyrian) in age (Woolnongh and David, 1926; Sprigg, 1951; Bowes, 1952), contam plant fossils and some Jamellibranches. They are exposed at Mt. Babbage and in an extensive easterly dipping tabJeland nearby, as a thin capping (25-30 feet} unconformably resting on granitized Precambrian sediments (Bowes, 1952: Sprieg, 1981), West of Mt. Babbage a thick series of coarse cross-bedded grits. and gravels passing upwards inte micaceous sands and massive fossiliferous quartzite is exposed in a deep valley unconformably above the Precambrian granite complex. Of these sediments the upper 30 feet of micaceaus sands and quartzite is equivalent to the plateau formation of Mt. Babhage. The strata which have a marked easterly dip of 5° have a maximum measured thick- ness of 100 feet. Severe faulting in 4 north-easterly direction has resulted in a. displacement vertically of the Mt, Babbage strata between 150 and 200 feet, At these highest points ouly 25 to 30 feet of overmass sediments are represented. It seems most probable therefore that initial sedimentation tank Place in a Jacustrine erivironment bounded ta the east hy a fault-line scarp of probable Palaeozvic age. A late Mesozoic transgression succeeding the accumulation of the Jower 75-80 feet of clastic sediments resulted in deposition of the coarse inicaccons sandstones which are represented in the Mt. Babhage section. From the upper grey quartzite have heen obtained impressions of fassil wood and leaves, together With some silicified lamellibranch remains. The coarse angular 10 character of the lower deposits, eross-bedding, and their obvious derivation from the Precambrian source rocks close by, stiggests rapid accumulation of these clastic sediments ina lacustrine intermontane environment, Following the identification af a plant closely related to Nuthorstiana described previonsly from Europe as a dune inhabitant, it ig possible that the upper 25 to 30 fect of fossiliferous micaceous satidstone and quartzite may represent fossil dune deposits murginal to areas of lacustrine accumulation, which have since been consolidated by processes of secondary silicification. Successive stages i the erosion of these beds may be traced, on the western cdown-faulted block, from terrace levels, of which four, at approximately 15-20 feet intervals, were identified, Ferruginization and the lithologic similarities of the arenaceons mentbers make specife correlations within this lower dissected area difficult, Correlation of the upper qtiartzite is possihje on the basis of the abundant Fossil plant impressions. Correlation of these beds and the ferruginized micaccous sands, gtits, and boulder beds cast of Mt. Babbage seems justified from lithologic and palaeontologic evidence, These boulder beating beds underlie the gypsiferous blue-grey shales of lower Cretaceous age, so that, assuming equivalence of the Mt, Babbage sections and these heds, the upper quartzite with plant fossils and lamellibranchs and the underlying micaceous sands and ferruginized grits containing a similar fiora are Lower Cretaceous in age and helong to the Blythesdale sandstone. Late Cainozoic sedimentation is represented by coarse. alluvial boulder beds, redistributed duricrist quartzite boulders and aeolian sand deposits which overlie the Mesozoic sediments cast of the Flinders Ranges, 1. STRATIGRAPHIC SUCCESSION 1. PrRecaMBRIAN Sheared illite (Sturlian); granite, quarte-felspar pegmatite, quartzite, gcisses, schists, ¢tc,, form a basement complex in which there is pronounced lineation N.70° E, The rocks form a granite complex ef which Sprigg (1951) discussing the Mt. Babbage Granite Complex states: “To the west the coarsely telspathic types appear to dontinate whereas near the south-eastern margin the granite is strongly “gneissic”, and at the actual border is highly sheared and ailicifed, On its southern aspect the granite border parallels the adjacent meta~- sedimentary structutes fairly faithfully, but elsewhere sedimentary structures run obliquely into the gramite. Faulting along the margins is therefore a pro- bability.” Bowes (1952) has discussed in detail the petrology of these Precambrian rocks. 2, Lower Cretaceous (Lare NrocowrAn-earty Artran), BLYTHESDALE SANDSTONE. The mediunt to coarse-grained inicaccons sandstones, ferruginized grits and {uartzites of the Mt. Babbage area are placed on palaeobotanical evirlence as belong- ing to the Lower Cretaceous, Equivalent sediments, finer grained and less ferrugin- uus, expased along the banks of the Llamilton Creek and 25 miles south vf Muloo- wurtina consist of coarse cross-bedded sandstones, grits and gravels together with intercalated plant-bearing carbonaceous shales. In the upper partion of these beds boulders, formerly regatded as glacial erratics, occur both im situ and_seattered over the surface, The close similarity between the flora of Hamilton Creck and Mt, Babbage stuggests these strata to he equivalent, and lower Cretaceous in age. The dominantly arenaceous sediments are typically lacustrine in nature, their eross-bedded heterogeneous aspect denoting rapid and turbulent conditions of sedimentation in an environment close to the source rocks, Lateral variations of these sediments are consequently most marked, making specific correlation of individual members very difficult. At Mt, Balbage and in the adjacent eastern tableland the sediments in descending wrder consist of + 1 Lithology Thickness Massive grey duricrust quartzite capping which weathers into Jarge angular blocks, containing fussil plant impressioms and some silicified lamellibranchs (7 Unio sp.) aid passing into a coarse silicified quartz con- glomerate at the base. The quartzite is eruss-bedded in places and has , undergone pronounced. secondary silicification _ - - - 10-15 Laminated medium-grained micaceous silty sands with ferruginous bands yellowish-brown in culour; the grains sub-angular to angular are dominantly quartzite in composition; some blue-etey quartz pebbles are included. In places they are mottled purplish-grey to reddish-brown, in culuur - - 419 These sediments, displaced vertically some 150 feet, overlie uncon- formably the Mt. Babbage Granite complex. The lower members of this section are exposed to the north-west of Mt. Babbage on the downfaulted side, where they are revealed in descending order; Dark-brown ferruginous angular white quartz pebble conglomerate - 12 Coarse heterogermous sub-angular grit, slightly ferruginons with micaceous buff-coloured sandy lenses — - os id - - . - 2 Interealated grey quartzites and light-brown micaceaus sands. - - §’ Massive grey quartzite, strongly jointed in a north-south direction, grading to the south and west tito a coarse porcellauised ferruginous grit with white quartz pebble lenses and intercalated quartz grits - - 15 Interbedded ferruginous dark reddish-brown coarse angular grits, micaceous sandstones and coarse rounded white quartz pebble beds lensing into massive quartzite with intercalated micaceous sand members in the top 5 feet - 18° A composite section reveals therefore more than 100 feet of these Mesozoic sediments. To the east of the Mt, Babbage tablelands, distant approximately half a mile, further ferruginous grits, and micaceaus sands heating fossil plant remains are exposed unconformably above the Pre- cambrian rocks. In the ereck-hed adjacent to Gun Powder Bore are consolidated reddish to buff-coloured sandstones which dip east below the Cretaceous clays. These sediments form part of the section of a series ef high cliffs exposed approximately 500 yards to the west. The section revealed from these cliffs consists in descending order of : (1) Cross-bedded ferruginised gritty sands with a well consolidated dark heterogeneous grit in which are large boulders of porphyry, quartzite, schist, gneiss, etc, The beds have yielded fossil wood and the upper sand below the boulder bed cotitais organic impressions similar to those of the Mt. Babbage quartzite. - - - - - - wy (2) Laminated fine white relatively unconsolidated quartz sands which are mottled purplish and red with white tmicaceous sandy shale larninae and pebbly zreenish-grey micaceous sands. The thickness of this bed varies predominantly blue-grey and white quartz pebbles. - - - - 2 (3) Course sands and gravel Jenses with dark ferruginous bands overlying a basal. ferruginoys reddish-hrown quartz gravel, this lowermost member marking the unconformity with the Precainbran - - - - 3 Correlation of these sediments has been made with those exposed in the banks of Hamilton Creek, where similar micaceous sands, carbona- cents shales and boulder beds are tevealed. A typical section from the pis cliffs north of Terrapinna Waterhole reveals in descending order: (1} Reddish-brown piedmont boulder conglomerates with intercalated gravels overlying unconformity - - - - - - - wy (2) Coarse boulder conglomerate marked by a basal bed cotitaining large (5-f feet) rounded quartzite, granite, gneissic Eranite, schisi, etv., with finer pebbly matrix, the whole being set in a mottled greenish-grey to brown consolidated silty sand. This passes above into a mottled finer hetero- geriéous houlder bed with intercalated finer gravelly Jenses and at the top pebhly greenish-grey tiieateous sands, The thickness of this hed varies considerably laterally - - # 12 {3) Light-brown cross-bedded gypsiferous mottled and banded greyish-brown silty clays with overlying cross-bedded coarse angular quartz gravels, the pebbles averaging approximately 4 inch in diameter and set i & finer i sandy matrix - ~ - - - - ” = < 4 (4) Medium-grained light-brown to grey quartz grit with lensing angular gravel members, the pebbles consisting of quartz and felspar; cross-bedded, carbonaceous in places - - - - - - - 2 (3) Coarse Ferruginous yellow-brown cross-bedded angular grits with inter- calated finer grey satidy lenses The thickness of this member is variable, the tup being marked by a dark yellow-brown limonitic band - - WwW Overlying the Precambrian, west of Muloowurtina woolshed, is the basal member of this succession which consists of a medium-grained relatively uncon- solidated yellowish-brown micaceous clastic sandstone with intercalated ferrugin- ised brown fimoritic bands and coarse angular grit lenses, the thickness of this member being approximately 10 feet. Overlying this are intercalated micaceous sands, grits, gtavels and carbonaceous shales similar to those described above. The sediments vary, Jaterally, however, the gravelly and carbonaceous units lensing and dividing. The beds are locally folded into shallow anticlines and syn- clines, the limbs of which dip between 4° and 5°, Lithologically similar quartz grits and gravelly sands exposed along the eastern scarp of the range enable correlation with the boulder-bearing sands described previously by David and Woolnough as a “gritty tillite’. These sediments which were regatded as Winton Beds are equivalent to the Hamilton Creek boulder beds ftom which upper Gondwana plants have been obtained, They consist of yellowish-hbrown con- solidated gritty sandstones overlying unconlermably the Precambrian meta- morphic complex, Contained in these gritty sands are abundant silicifed fossil tree trunks and scattered over the suriace are numerous boulders of quartzite, porphyry, gneiss, etc, Only three sizeable boulders were found in sity within this bed, ane a dark blnish-grey quartzite possibly faceted, one rounded grey quartzite and @ roughly triangular quartz felspar rock, The sediments enclosing these boulders. consist of clastic quartz, the grains sub-rounded and heterogeneous but of medium coarseness, Intercalated in the lower region of this quartzite are finer sands and soft grey clay lenses ayeraging 2-5 inches in thickness, The upper limit of the bed consists of a consolidated and ferruginized coarse quartz grit with abundant sub-angular blue-grey quartz pebbles. The base of the hed is marked by a coarse quartz conglomerate, ferruginised and consolidated. This bed has an easterly dip of 11°; strike 330°. The grits lic below the easterly dipping blue-grey, Lower Cretaceous (Roma) clays from which fossiliferous marine Jimestone nodules have been obtained. No supporting evidence can be found for the previously propesed glacial origin of these boulders in- Cretaceous times. The lack of glacial striae, the effects of fluviatile transport, and the proximity of similar tock types in the Flinders Ranges suggests the most probable origin of the boulders ‘to be scree accumulations, redistributed hy fuviatile agencies, and deposited marginal to a widespread Jacustrine area, Some of the quartzite boulders are identical with erratics now im situ in the Sturtian Tillite nearby. Derivation of faceted boulders from this Formation seems the most obvious explanation for their occurrence. The thickness nf the boulder-bearing sands and clays has been estimated at this locality to be 60 feet. 3. Lower Creraceous ( APTIAN) Roma ForMATION Fossiliferous blue-grey, yellow and white marine shales of Lower Cretaceous age (Aptian) are exposed extensively in the Muloowurtina area. North of the horiestead they have a shallow easterly dip of 2-3°, and form extensive tablelands capped by a hard siliceous Durierust. Wonoluough (1927), discussing this super- ficial deposit, states: 13 “All the Duricrust in this locality possesses a more or less well marked conecretionaty stricture. Sometimes this results in spheroidal] nodules; but, in some instances, the concretions are much elongated in a direction perpendicular to the original surface... . In one place, near Muloowurtina, the avetagé diameter of the nodules is over three feet and they reach a length of at least fifteen feet ....” These features were noted by the writer, but in places the Duricrist above the Cretaceous marine beds is represented as a dense indurated quartzite, and in still further cases a3 a porcellanised prayel unit, To the south of Muloowurtina the Cretaceous beds have been extensively folded, the major fold axes trending roughly N.W.-S.E, Easterly dips of up to 35° have been measured, and in cases reverse dips to the west of up to 20° have been introduced. Woolnough {1927} also states: "Tn addition to this folding along the strike there has been subordinate dip faulting, so that the Duricrust remnants are disposed ‘en echelon’.” The {nlding of this area thus post-dated the formation of the Duricrust, and has been largely responsible for the formation of the series of low rounded foothills along the eastetn Flinders scarp which are overlain by a heavy “gibber” scree of derived Duricrust. North of Muloowurtina the Cretaceous sediments in descending order consist of : Lithology Thickness (1) Massive pebbly chert and dense quartzite, grey and stained reddish-brown, with sub-rounded white and grey quartz pebbles = - - - - I (2) Grey silty gypsiferaus clays 5-6" which pass transitionally into a seyerely kaolinised white micaceous soft sandstone with abundant free gypsum. The upper 12 feet of these white beds are mottled pink with small orange-pink erystals of selenite gypsum, bedded and disseminated; some purplish rem- nants and dark brown ferriginous conerctions 7 - - - 4y (3) Yellow gypsiferous clays with limonitic bands and ferruginous Senses and containing the foraminifera Haplophragmoides dickinsoni Crespin and Ammobaculoides romaensis Crespin, etc. - - - - - 28° (4) Dark blue-grey to mottled greenish-brown gypsiferous clays with large plates of selemte gypsum, the clays weathering into powdery greenish-bluc detritus. The clays enclose gypsum covered concretions of fine-grained blue-grey dolomitic limestone between 18 inches and 2 feet in diameter. In addition, lower Cretaceous marine fossils, including belemnites (Prrato- belus oxys) and pelecypods (Maccoyella sp.; Nucwlana cf. randsi), were obtained = - - ~ ~ - - - - 420°+- South of Muloowurtina where deformation has been more pronounced the \tpper section has undergone more severe alteration. Here ferruginisation and mottling in shades of red, yellow and mauve obscure the original nature of the sediments. The lower blue-gtey shales have also undergone incipient alteration, the ferruginous banding fo awing bedding structures in these sediments. Minor faulting has taken place along lines parallel to the strike of these marine beds. Gypsum, abundant as both bedded and disseminated masses, is largely of secondary origin, the result of leaching and redeposition during periods of aridity. Fine-grained dolomitic nodules within the beds are surrounded by crystalline gypsum which encloses. an intermediate yellow-brown to dark ferruginosis layer. The fauna, while not abundant, definitely indicates a lower Cretaceous (Aptian) age for these sediments, They belong therefore tao the Roma Group and not, as previously stated ( Woolnotigh and David, 1926) to the Winton Beds. Latr Carnozorc — Recent Piedmont boulder beds, alluvial clays and aeolian sand deposits overlie the Mesozoic sediments cast of the Flinders Ranges. Downcutting by Hamilton Creek has exposed more than 15 feet of coarse boulder conglomerates and reddish-brown 14 clays unconformably overlying the Mesozoic sediments, Dissectian and breaking up of the “Duricrust” has resulted in the accumulation of coarse chert "gibbers” in areas formerly overlain by this bed, IV, STRATIGRAPHIC POSITION OF THE PLANT-BEARING SEDIMENTS The lowermost Cretaceous deposits described fram the Great Artesian Rasin are terrestrial strata, dominantly arenaceaus in coniposition with subordinate coal- bearing phases. These sediments, defined originally by Lockhart Jack (1895) as the “Blythesdale Braystones” underlie the Rolling Downs Formation ( Aptiag- Cenomanian) : “In mapping the eastern limit of the Lower Cretaceous fotmation we find that at the base there is a series of soft grey very friable limestones, grits and conglomerates. ...- To this rock we felt it necessary to give a distinctive name, the ‘Blythesdale Beaystone’, as it is well developed at Blythesdale near Roma, . - Hitherto it has been convenient to speak of the beds designated the Blythes- dale Braystone as being of similar composition throughout. This, however, is not the case, us the braystone of normal composition is ‘parted’ in places by beds of sandy shale and calcureous sandstone. We may imagine coarse sandy and gravelly sediments brought down to the margin of a shallow lower Cretaceous sea hy numerous tributary rivers and spread out along the shore and out to sea by the action of waves and currents. The sea in which the Blythesdale Braystone was deposited ..... was very shallow throughout .- . . swept from end to end by currents .. .. sufficiently powerful , .. . to account for the wide distribution of the sand and gravel which is evidenced by the Artesian Wells.” The sediments become paralic in fheir upper development (Whitehouse, 1952). The Blythesdale Sandstone is known in South Australia principally from Stuarts Range and south-east of Lake Eyre, where it has been regarded as basal Cretaceous and/or Upper Jurassic in age. (Recent foraminiferal investigations from bore cores by Miss I, Crespin (1945) have yielded a number of foraminifera fram “carbonaceous shales and sandstones’ which are of lower Cretaceous age but the stratigraphic position of these sediments is not clearly indicated), In the Orallo and Vingerhay districts, Queensland, the Blythesdale beds have been recognised as late Neocomian—eatly Aptian in age (Whitehouse (1952 . 97), The non-ealcareous upper Blythesdale is succeeded by the calcareous Rolling Downs Formation, but there is no initial time break, The lower sequence of coarse arenaceous grits, sands, gravels and inter- bedded carbonaceous shales and boulder beds of Muloowurtina are ascribed to the lower Cretaceous and are considered as equivalents of the Blythesdale Sand- stones. As in the case of the more fully developed Queensland depusits the upper Bivthesdale has a paralic developricnt in this locality, intercalated blue-grey shale bands forming hetween the gritty sandstone members in the upper part of the section. The srenaceous beds are overlain conformably by the Aptian marine shales and no time break is indicated from geologic evidence. Also the presence of a late Mesozoic dora, including lycopod stigmaria related to those from European Lower Cretaceous deposits, supporis the contention that these beds are of similar aye, Stratigraphic correlation of these strata is made with a sequence of coarse ferruginous sands, grits, gravels and plant-bearing quartzites which overlie rey eet Precambrian rocks and are themselves conformably overlain by the Roma beds at Algebuckina Hill west of Lake Eyre, The sediments examined earlier by the writer represent exposures from the Blythesdale Sandstones recog- nised previously from Stuarts Range and south-east of Lake Eyre, Interbedded coarse sandstones and sibordinate clay shales underlying lower Cretaceotis marine 15 beds and regarded by Whittle (1952) as Jurassic, more probably represent the basal Cretaceous Blythesdale Sandstones. It should be noted that although the so-called Eyrian (early Tertiary) beds of Mt. Babbage ( Woolnough and David, 1926) have now conclusively beety shown as Lower Cretaceous in age, the presence of Tertiary continental deposits has been proved from subsurface investigations by Lockhart Jack (1925) at Cordillo Downs, where 365 feet of dominantly arenaceous sediments overlie unconform- ably lignite-bearing upper Cretaceous beds, V. PALAEONTOLOGY Identification of the plant fossils from the Blythesdale sandstone formation (Glaessner and Rao, 1955) are listed below: Nathorstianella babbagensis (H. Woodward). Locality: Mt. Babbage. Cladophlebis australis (Morris). Locality: Woolshed section, Muloowurtina and two miles north-east of Flinders No. 5 tale mine. Tacniopteris spatulata McClelland, Locality: Fiat-topped hill about + mile north- east of Mt. Babbage and Woolshed section, Muloowurtina station. Otosamites bengalensis (Oldham and Morris). Locality: Flat-topped hill about 4 mile north-east of Mt, Babbage. Cycadites sp. Locality: Woolshed section, Muloowiirtina. Nilssonia schoumburgensis (Dunker). Locality: Woolshed section, Muloowurtina, (Collected by Miss M. J. Wade.) Elatoctadus planus (Feistmantel), Locality: Flat-topped hill about $ mile north- east of Mt, Babbage. In addition to this flora, fossil wood specimens have been collected from Mt, Bahbage, Hamilton Creek and 24 miles south of Muloowurtina station, T he Aolltiientg invertebrate fossils have been provisionally identified by Unio sp.: From quartzite belonging to the Blythesdale Sandstone. Locality: Mt. Babbage. Pevatobelus oxrys (Tenison Woods) and Maccoyella ef, barklyi Moore, From blue clays of the Roma formation, Locality: £ mile north of Muloowurtina station. Nuculana cf. randsi Ethridge. From blue clays of the Roma Formation. Locality : 24 miles south of Muloowurtina station, Ammobaculoides romacnsis Crespin and Haplophragmoides dickinsoni Crespin. Arenaceous foraminifera found in yellow clays of Roma Formation. T.ocality ; 14 miles north-west of Muloowurtina station, VI. REGIONAL CORRELATION 1. Brery Sperncs AREA West of Muloowurtina, ferruginous grits, micaceotis shaly sandstones and pehble conglomerates have been deposited in isolated shallow lacustrine basins. Concerning the Billy Springs area Sprigg (1951) states: “A small outlier of sandstones . .. . has heen noted by S. B. Dickinson on a low divide about one mile N-E. of Billy Springs. The sediments contain vegetable matter, but at present their age is unknown. . . . . the material has the appearance of certain eas sandstones but .... many Tertiary sandy beds preserved in the adjacent Frome sunklands, appear similar.” The sediments which were examined by the writer consist of finely laminated baff to pale-brown micaceous sands with intercalated eritty and pebbly lenses, the thickness exceeding 30 feet. The sediments are lithologically similar to the 16 micaceous sands underlying the fossiliferous quartzite of Mt, Babbage. Lithologic similarity of these beds with the Mt. Babbage section suggests them to be of the same age (Lower Cretaceous). 2. West or Frinpers RaNcEs Bordering the western foothills of the Flinders Ranges high tablelands reveal in descending order: Lithology Thickness (i) Massive grey “Duricrust” chert with subordinate gypsum = - - - +1) (2} Blue-grey gypsiferous clay shales laminated yellow-brown and ferruginised 7 (3) Dark-brown limonitic band = - - - - “ = _ 6 (4) Fine cross-bedded yellow-brown to buff quartz grits passing into laminated red and brown ferruginous quartz sands = - - - ~ - 2 (5) Laminated grey to yellow-brown fine micaceotis: silty sandstones, semi- consolidated with occasional quartz and shale pebbles and carbonaceous Shale lenses yielding lignitic fragments and leaf impressions of Clado- bhlebis australis (Mortis) - - - - ~ - & (6) Blue-grey micaceous silty clays with disseminated gypsum and bands of consolidated yellow-brown limonitic iron, grading transitionally into laminated yellow-brown sandy clay shales = - - - - 2B (7) Dark-brown micaceous gritty sandstane with intercalated pebbly lenses and ferruginous bands - - - - - - - - +3 Total exposed thickness - - ~ +74! The presence. of Cladophiebis australis indicates that these sediments. may be of Upper -Jurassic~Lower Cretaceous age. These lacustrine deposits have a gentle westerly dip which conforms with the main direction of current bedding, indicating the sediments to have been deposited in a widesptead region of depression marginal to the Precambrian source rocks of the Flinders Range, 3. One Mize Sours or Copitey TowNnsHip Seventy-one feet of current bedded lacustrine sediments tentatively classed as Jurassic (Parkin 1953) overlie Triassic coal-beating beds one mile south of Copley. The sediments in descending order are: Lithology Thickness (1) Grey chert cementing quartz. “Duricrust’ eappilig containing impressions of fossil wood, plants, ete. “ - - - - ~ +10 (2) Coarse current-bedded buff to yellow-brown micaccous qttartz grits becom- ing ferruginous and consolidated at the surface, the grains sub-angular. In this bed ate intercalated white micaceous fine-grained, sandy shale bands 3-4” in thickness with gritty laminae and some fossil wood impressions, At the base are silty kaolin bands with a coarse gravel bed of cemented slate, chert, and quartzite boulders - - > - - - - 49 (3) Coarse cross-bedded micaceous pirple quartz grits with intercalated gravel lenses, white sands and kaolin nodules - - - - - 17 (4) Basal conglomerate, dark purple in color of variable thickness showing cut and fill effects and marking the unconformity with the underlying Precambrian slates ~ - - - 2 - os a 9’ While confirmatory evidence of a Jurassic age for these deposits is lacking, the presence of fossil wood remains similar to those from Mt. Babbage and other areas, and the lithologic character of the deposits suggests them to correspond to the widespread lacustrine accumulations of Jurassic-Cretaceous age described above. Torrential stream deposition is clearly eviderwed by the pronounced current bedding and coarse clastic nature of the sediments, GEOLOGICAL MAP MULOOWURTINA AREA -) yf. ‘4 og MULOQOWURTINA AL HOMESTEAD TERRAPINNA y WA ares STRATIGRAPHIC SUCCESSION ALLUVIAL SANDS @ 0] 420" SEOMONT GRAVELS, BOULDER BEOS & CLASTIC SANDS UNCONFORMITY QUATERNARY { @ WAQUMITIG SILTY SANDS, SUPERFICIAL QUARTZ:TE FOSSILIFEROUS VELLOW CLAY SHALES Lower CRETACEOUS @prian) FOSSKIFEROUS MARINE BLUE GREY SHALES (ROMA FORMATION) ee M4 o t = £ & $s 3 ¥ LOWER (BLVTHESDALE SANOSTONE} €RETACEOUS 4100" INTERBEDOED COARSE ANGULAR SANDS, GRAVELS, BASE MAP COMPLED FROM AERAL PHOTOGRAPHS Al RBONACE WEOCOMAN) Gai OUS SHALES & BOULDER B£OS DRAWN BY E.8,SUMMERS. 1953 ADELAIOE STURT TILUITE & ASSOCIATED GRANITE COMPLEYES SYSTEM GEOLOGICAL SECTIONS MULOOWURTINA HORIZONTAL SCACE Er ¥ HABE ang x & May MESOZOIC GENERALISED STRATIGRAPHIC COLUMN MULOOWURTINA RECENT ORIFT SAND, RIVER GRAVELS, ETC. LATE CAINOZOIC — RECENT PIEDMONT GRAVELS, BOULDER BEOS, ETC SUPERFICIAL PORCELLANISEOD GRAVELS, ETC MOTTLED WHITE. REO, YELLOW SILTY KAOLINISED SANDS. MOTTLED YELLOW GYPSIFEROUS CLAY SHALES WITH HAPLOPHRAGMOWMES , AMMOBACULOIDES, ETC. LOWER CRETACEOUS ROMA FORMATION (Aeriam} FOSSILIFEROUS MARINE BLUE ~ GREY GYPS/IFEROUS CLAY SHALES WITH MACLOYELLA, PERATOBELUS ETC GREY QUARTZITE WITH PLANT FOSSILS OR BOULDER BEDS WITH COARSE SANDSTONES ANDO FOSSIL TREES YELLOW-BROWN, CROSS-BEDDED QUARTZ SANOS, GRAVELS & CARBONACEOUS CLAYS LOWER CRETACEOUS WITH PLANT FOSSILS ~ LYCOPODS, : FAENIOPTERIS OTOZAMITES, ETC BLYTHESDALE SANDSTONE LATE MECCOMUN TO EARLY APTN} PRE-CAMBRIAN GRANITE COMPLEX 17 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This research project was made possible through research funds of the Geology Department, University of Adelaide. The writer is indebted to Professor A. R. Alderman, and to Dr. M. F. Glaessner, for their assistance in this project and for much helpful criticism and advice concerning the preparation of this manuscript. The writer also expresses his appreciation to Mrs. E, B. Simmers, and to Messrs. B. Daily, A. W. Kleeman and V. R. Rao for assistance concerning various aspects of this work, Air photos were kindly made available by the Survey Branch, Department of the Army. LIST OF REFERENCES Bowes, D. R. 1952 “The Transformation of Quartzite by Migmatisation at Mt. Fitton, South Australia.” Sir Douglas Mawson Anniversary Volume, Adelaide Davin, Size T. W. E.,, ed. W. R. Browne 1950 “The Geology of the Commonwealth of Australia.” London Cresemy, 1. 1945 “Preliminary notes on a microfauna from the Lower Cretaceous deposits in the Great Artesian Basin.” Dept. of Supply and Shipping; Min. Res. Surv. Rept. No, 1945/6, February 1945 Du Tort, A. L. 1917 “Problem of the Great Australian Artesian Basin.” Journ. Roy, Soc. N.S.W., 51, 135-207 Fairarincr, RW. 1953 “Australiat: Stratigraphy,” 2nd ed, University of Western Australia. Grazssner, M. F., and Rao, V. R, 1955 “Lower Cretaceous Plant Remains from the vicinity of Mt. Babbage, South Australia.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust, 78 Jack, R.L. 1895 “Artesian Water in the Western Interior of Queensland.” Publ, Geol, Surv., Qld., No.. 101 (Bull, 1) ParKIN, - a 1953 “The Leigh Creek Coalfield,” Geol. Suty,, S. Aust, Bull. 31, chap, III, p Sprice, & c. Pads “Regional Geology in the Mt, Fitton Talc Area.” Geol. Sury. of S. Aust., ull. Warrenouse, F. W, 1926 “The Correlation of the Marine Cretaceous Deposits of Aus- tralia.” Rept. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 28 Vistrsnocal, ru in 1952 “The Mesozcic Environments of Queensland,” Aust. Assoc. v. Sci, Warrrte, A. W. G., and Cueeorarey, N. 1952 “Stratigraphic Correlations by Petrographic Methods Applied to the Australian Bores in the Lake Frome Area.” Sir Douglas Mawson Anniversary Volume, Adelaide Woopwarp, H. P. 1885 “Report on the Country east of Farina and northward to lat 23° 10°." Parl, Paper 40, Gov. Printer, Adelaide Wootxoucn, W. G. 1924 “Evidence of Glacial Action in Central Australia in Late Meso- zoic Time.” Rept. Aust, Assoc, Adv. Sci., 17, (Adelaide) Woo.noucn, W. G., and Davm, T. W. E. 1926 “Cretaceous Glaciation in Central Aus- tralia.” Quart, Journ. Geol. Soc, Lond., 82, 332 Wootxouch, W. G. 1926 “Geology of the Flinders Ranges, South Australia, in the neigh- bourhood of Wooltana Station.” Proc. Roy, Soc. N.S.W., 60, 300-330 Wootnouce, W. G, 1927 Presidential Address, Pt. 2, “The Duricrust of Australia.” Journ. and Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 61, 29-46 , THE MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF THE PLIOCENE STRATA UNDERLYING THE ADELAIDE PLAINS PART II - PELECYPODA BY N. H. LUDBROOK* Summary Part II of the study of the mollusca recovered from borings into the Dry Creek Sands of Pliocene age consists of a systematic revision of the Pelecypoda. The nomenclature of 120 species has been completely revised and 20 species described as new. One new name is introduced. The geological and environmental background of the fauna, together with an analysis of its relationships with molluscan faunas outside Australia, was discussed in Part I, published in the Transactions of the Society, 77, pp. 42-64, 1954. A map showing the position of the bores from which material was examined was included in Part I. 18 THE MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF THE PLIOCENE STRATA UNDERLYING THE ADELAIDE PLAINS PART II — PELECYPODA By N. H. Lupnroox * [Read 13 May 1954] SUMMARY Part Il of the study of the mollusca recovered from borings mto the Dry Creek Sands of Pliocene age consisis of a systematic revision of the Pelecypoda, The nomenclature of 120 species has heen completely revised and 20 species described as new. Onc new name is introduced. The geological and environmental background of the fauna, together with an analysis of its relationships with molluscan faunas outside Australia, was discussed in Part I, published in the Transactions of the Suciety, 77, pp. 42-64, 1954. A map showing the position of the bores from which material was examined was inclitded in Part 1. INTRODUCTION In the following systematic siudy, diaguosés of species have been made, where possible, from the holetypes. Where the holotype was not available, the diagnosis has been made from specimens found im borings made. available to the writer. Similarly, dimensions cited are, wherever possible, those of the holotype. Abbreviations o.d. for original designation and s.d. for subsequent designation of type species have been employed throughout. Collections in which specimens are lodged are abbrevited as hereunder: Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, for Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide. S. Aust. Mines Dept. Coll., for Collection of the South Australian Mines Department. S. Aust. Mus. Coll, for South Australian Museum Collection, Adelaide. Aust. Mus, Coll., for Australian Museum Collection, Sydney. Nat. Mus. Coll., for National Museum Collection, Melbourne. Geol. Surv, Coll, for Collection of the Geological Survey of Victoria, Melbourne. Melb. Univ. Geol, Dept, for Collection of the Geology Department, University of Melbourne, BM, Coll., for British Museum (Nattiral History) Collection, Lotidon. Class PELECYPODA Order FILIBRANCHIA Family NUCULIDAE Genus Nucuta Lamarck, 1799 Nucula Lamarck, 1799, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat., Paris, p. 87 Type species (Monotypy) Arca nucleus Linné Subgenus Ennvcura lredale 1931 Ennuctla Tredale, 1931, Rec. Aust. Mus,, 18, (4), p. 202. (Evntcula Tredate. Cotton, 1947, Rec. S.A. Mus. 8, (4), p. 655, 656, lapsus calomi for Fvnucula). L i Type species (o.d.) Nucula obliqua Lamarck Nucula (Ennucula) kalimnae Singleton, pl. 1, fig. 1, 2 Nucula tumida Tenison Woods, Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust, 8, p. 127, pl. 6, fig. Gi, 6b. Nucula tenisont Pritchard. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict. 1, (2), p. 146. Nucula obliqua Lamarck. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 55, p, 150. Nucula kalimnae Singleton, 1932. Proc. Roy, Soc. Vict, 44, (18-), (2), p. 292-94, pl, 24, fig. 7-9. * Department of Mines, Adelaide. 19 Diagnosis—Shell relatively large, heavy, moderately inflated ; anterior hinge area gently arcuate, less arched than in the Recent NV. obliqua; inner yentral margin sometimes obscurely crenulate. Dimensions—Length 20°5; height 15; thickness (right valve) 6°5 mm. Type Locality—Cutting on maim road above bridge, Jemmy's Point, Kalimna, Victoria; Lower Pliocene. Location of Holetype—No, 1312, Melb. Univ. Geol. Dept. Observations—Adelaide specimens are smaller and less heavy than the Gippsland Lakes holotype, but approximate more closely to kalimnae than to vbligua, which is a broader and less tumid shell, more arched on the anterior dorsal margin, The writer agrees with Singleton that the differences exhibited hy Muddy Creek (and also Adelaide) shells are not of sufficient magnitude to warrant specific distinction. There is a lineal descent from N. tenisoni through N, kalimnae and its Muddy Creek, Adelaide, and Werrikooian examples, in that order, to the Recent N. obliqua, with which Adelaide specimens have been pre- viously identified. Material—7 valves, maximum dimensions length 11 mm., height 8 mm., from Wevmouth’s Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Lower to Upper Phocene, Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria, to Adelaide, South Aus- tralia, Nucula (Ennucula) beachportensis Verco pl. 1, fig. 3, 4 Nucla beachportensis Verco, 1907. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 31, p- 216, pl, 27, fig. 3. Ennucula beachportensis Verco. Cotton and Godfrey, 1938. Moll. §. Aust, p. 41, text fig. 14 Diagnosis—Very small, anterior dorsal margin straight and clongate, nosterior margin short and somewhat truncate, ventral border uniformly ctirved. imbo at about posterior one-sixth. Inner margin minutely crenulate. Dimensions—Length 4-9, height 4°6 mm. Type Locality—Ott Beachport, 40 fathoms, Recent. Location of Holotype—S, Aust. Mus. Reg. No. D 11310. Observations—This is a very small species, recorded fossil For the first time. It is distinguishable by its elongate posterior margin and finely crenulate inner ventral margin. Materia_—One complete specimen, 10. yalves, Hindmarsh Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creel Sands and Recent. Geographical Distribulion—Yasmania; Beachport to Cape Jaffa, South Atis- tralia. Nucula (Ennucula) venusta N. H. Woods pl. & fig. 1 Nucula venusta NW. 1£ Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 55, p. 147, pl. 7, fig. 2. Diagnosis—Solid, ventricose, mmbo very prominent, inclined markedly to posterior, Ventral margin flattened or obsoletely denticulate. Dimensions—Leneth 56, height 48 mm. Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide, South Australia; Pliocene. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll, Univ. of Adclaide. T 1678 Observations—The one perfect left valve is of approxiinately the same size as the holotype fram the Abattoirs Bore. The chondrophore ts very oblique falmost horizontal), narrow, and deeply grooved. The inner ventral margin is obsoletely denticulate. Material—Holotype ; four left valves, one almost perfect, and two right valves from Weymouth’s Bore. Stratigraphicol Range—Dry Creek Sands. 20 Geographical Distribution—Abattoirs and Weymouth’s Bores, Adelaide. Genus PRoNucuLa Hedley, 1902 Pronucula Hedley 1902. Mem, Aust. Mus., 4, (5), p. 290 Type species (o.d.) Pronucula decorosa Hedley Pronucula morundiana Tate Nueula mortundions Tate, 1886. Trans. Ray. Soc. S. Aust., 8, p. 128. Nucula morundiana Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol, Vict, 1, (2), p. 122. Nucida morundiana, Tate. N, H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 55, p. 150. Pronucula morundiana Tate. Cotton, 1947, Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 655, Diagnosis—Shell minute, tumid, trigonal, inner margin of valves minutely denticulate, surface sculptured with fine, equal, concentric ribs. Dimensions—Length 3, height 3, thickness through both valves 2 mm, " Type Locality—River Murray Cliffs near Morgan, South Australia; Lower iocene. Location of Halotype—Tate Mus. Coll. Univ. of Adelaide, T 1042A. Observations—Adelaide material so far examined is vety poorly preserved and it is doubtful whether this species is smorundiana, Material—1 yalye, Hindmarsh Bore, Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Port Phillip Bay, Victoria — Adelaide, South Austrahia. Family NUCULANIDAE Genus Nucutana Link, 1807 Nuculena Link, 1807. Beschr. Nat. Samm], Univ, Rostock, (3), p. 155 (Leda Schumacher, 1817. Ess. Vers. test., p. 55, 173) Type species (monotypy) Arce rostrata Gmelin Subgenus ScaroLepa Iredale, 1929 Scaeoleda Iredale, 1929c, Rec, Aust. Mus., 17, (4), p. 158 Type species (0.d.) Leda crassa Hinds Nuculana (Scaeoleda) woodsi (Tate) pl. 1, fig. 5. Leda inconspicua Tenison Woods, 1878. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 3, p. 139, pl. 21, fie, 3. Leda woodsti Tate, 1886. Trans.. Roy. Soc. $. Atst., 8, p. 133, pl. 9, fiz. 8, Leda woodsii Tate, Tate and Dennant, 1893. Trans. Rey, Soc. §. Aust, 17, (1), p. 224. Nuculana woodsti Tate (sp.). Harris, 1897. Cat; Tert, Moll. Brit, Mus., p. 349, Leda woodsij Tate. Dermant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 122, 138. Nuculana woodsii Tenisaty Woods. N. H, Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust, 55, p. 150. Diagnosis—Small compressed, with angular posterior ridge from umbo to ventral margin; surface finely ribbed, ribs passing over ridge. Dimenstons—Length 12, height 6; thickness through both valves 3*5 mm. Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; {?) |.ower Miocene, Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll. Univ. of Adelaide. T 1039. Material—Two complete specimens, 5 valves, Hindmarsh Bore, 450-487 feet. 7 valves, Weymouth’s Bore, 310-330 feet, Straligraphical Range—? Oligocene to Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Victoria, Tasmania, South Australia, Nuculana (Scaeoleda) crebrecostata (Tenison Woods) pw, 1, fig. 6 Leda crebrecostats Tenison Woods, 1877. Proc. Roy. Soc, Tas, for 1876, p. 112. Leda crebrecostata Tenison Woods. Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 8, p. 143, pl. 5, g. Ja-b. h Leda creprerortats T. Woods. Nennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 123. Nuculana crebrecostata T, Woods, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 150. 2 Diagnosis—Trigonal, oblong, angular, gaping, Posterior area markedly depressed, cut off by narrow ridge from umbo to ventral margin, Surface sculp- tured with numerous fine lirae interrupted by ridge. Dimensions—Length 8, height 5, thickness through both valves 3 mm. Type Locality—Table ‘Cape, Tasmania, Location of Holotype—Roy, Soc. Coll.,, Tasmania. Material—Four valves, Abattoirs Bore. Stratigrap hical Range—? Oligocene to Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Table Cape, Tasmania; Spring Creek, Victoria; Adelaide, South Australia. Nuculana (Scaeoleda) verconis (Tate). pl. 1 fig. 7 Leda verconis Tate, 1891. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., for 1890, 14, p, 264, pl. 11, fig. 4. Naculana verconis Verco. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, p. 147, 150. Diagnosis—Elongate-ovate, posterior side shortly acuminated, with slightly curved keel. Surface sculptured with about 30 concentric lirae slightly incurved towards the posterior margin, Dimensions—Length 8, height 5, thickness through both valves 3°5 mm. Type Locality—Yankalilla Bay, South Australia; Recent. Location of Holotype—S. Aust. Mus. Reg, No. D 11340. Moterial—Two valves, Weymouth’s Bore; 5 valves, Abattoirs Bore. Stratigraphical Range——Dry Creek Sands and Recent, Geographical Distribution—-South Australia. Superfamily ARCACEA Family ARCIDAE Gens Arca Linné, 1758 Arca Linmé 1758. Syst. Nat. ed, 10, 1, p. 693. Arca Linné. Reinhart, 1935. Mus. Roy. d’Hist. nat. Belg, 11, (13), p. 14 (Synonymy). Type species (s.d. I.C.Z.N, 1945) ‘Arca none Linné Arca negata Cotton Arca navicularis Brug. Tate, 1890a. Trans. Roy. Sac. S. Aust., 13, (2), P “rca xavicularis. Brug. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., ae . 146, Arca navicularis Tate. N, H. Woods, 1931, pra Roy. Soc. S. Aust,, 55, Pp. is0. Arca neguta Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8 (4), p. 656, pl. 20, fig. 1, 12. Diagnosis—Umbones distant, acuic, harp ridge from umbo to posterior ventral margin; sculpture of fine, close radial ribs anterior to angle about 7 per mm.; cancellate in young stages. Dimenstons—Length 24, height 11 mm. Type Locality—Bore 65, 385-395 feet, Adelaide, South Australia; Pliocene, Location of Holotype—S. Anst, Mus. Coll., No. 8361. Moterial—Fiolotype; 1 right valve, Abattoirs Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands. Geographical Dtstributien—Abattoirs Bore; Bore 65. Genus BarrattA Gray, 1842 Barbatia Gray, 1842. Syn, Cont. Brit. Mus., p. 81 Type species (s.d, Gray, 1847) Arca barbata Tinné Subgenus RARRATTA 5. str. Barbatia (Barbatia) epitheca Cotton Arca (Burbutix) pistachia Lamarck. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 55, p. 150. Barbatia epitheca Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 8, (4), p. 657, pl, 20, fig, 14, 17, Diagnosis—Subquandrangular, anterior rounded, posterior longer and obliquely truncate, surface sculpture of fine and numerous radials crossed by equal concentrics. 22 Dimensions—Length 23, height 12 mm, Type Localtiy—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide, South Australia; Pliocene. Location of Hvlotype—S. Aust, Mus. Coll, No. 8313. Observations—The species described by Cotton is, according to its author (personal communication), smaller, longer, and more finely sculptured than the Recent pistachia with which it was originally identified, Material—Ilolotype. Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands, Geographical Distribution—Abattoirs Bore. Subgenus Acar Gray, 1857 Acar, Gray, 1857, Ann. Mag. Nat, Hist., ser, 2, 19, p. 360. Type species (8.d, Woodring, 1925) 4rca gradata Lroderip and Sowerby Barbatia (Acar) coma (Cotton) Acar coma Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p, 657, pl. 20, fig. 25, 26. Diagnosis—Subquadrangular, umbones close, sculpture of radial flattened ribs crossed by frilled Jamellac, Dimensions—Length 23 mm,, height 10 mm, Type Locality—Weymauth’s Bore, 345-350 feet: Pliocene. Location of Holotype—S, Aust. Mus., No. 8404. Material—Two left valves, Weymouth’s Bare, 310-330 feet. Sirutigruplical Range—Dry Creek Sands. Geegraphical Distribution—Weymouth’s Bore, Adelaide, Gentis CucuLrLaea Lamarck, 1801 Cucullaea. Lamarck, 1801. Syst. Anim, sans Vert,, p. 116 ‘Type species (s.d, Schmidt, 1818) Cucullaea auriculifera Lamarck = Arce concamera Bruguiére Cucullaea corioensis MeCoy pl. 1, fig. 8, 9 Cucullaea coriensis McCoy, 1876, Prod, Pal. Vict. 3, p. 32, pl. 27, fig, 4, 5. Cucullaea coricensis McCoy. Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy. Soc. S$. Aust. 8, p. 144, Cucullaeu carioensis McCoy. Jotnston, 1888. Geol. Tas. pl. 29, fig, 4, 4a. Cucullaea corioensis McCoy. Tate and Dennant, 1893. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 17, (1), p. 224. Cuculluea corivensis McCoy. Pritchard, 1896, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 8 (ns.), p. 131, Cucullaea coriognsiy McCoy, Harris, 1897, Cat, Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, p. 336. Cucullaea corioensis MeCoy. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree, Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), pp. 122, 138, 145 (pars). Crcullava coriaensis McCoy, Chapman and Gabriel, 1914. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 26, (2), (1.8.), p. 302, Cucnllaew curioensis MeCay. Singleton, 1932. Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., 44, (tus,), (2), p. 300-303, Diagndsis—Large, heavy, obliquely trapezoidal; ratio anterior to posterior part oi hinge generally less than 1, Sculpture of fine radiating ridges, 3 per mm. at 8 mm. frotn umbo, crossed by closely spaced growth lines with undulations on the ribs. Tupe Locality--Bird Rock, near Spring Creek, Victoria. Location of Hololype—National Museum, Melbourne, Material—Tive complete, 1 bruken valye, Weymouth’s Bore; 13 valves, Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, 14789, L6598, L42238-42, 70411, B.M. Coll, 1 valve Werribee, Victoria; 5 valves River Murray, South Australia. Stratigraphical Range—? Oligocene to Pliocene (B.A.S., N /H.L.). Geographical Distribution—Victoria, Tasmania, South Australia. 23 Cucullaea praelonga Singleton pl. 5, fig. 15 Cucullaea corioensis McCoy, 1876. Prod, Pal. Vict., 3, pl. 27, iz. 3 (7), 3a (om 4, 5S), Cuctllaea corioensis McCoy. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), 9, 138, Cueullaea coriaensis praclonga Singleton, 1932. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 44 (ns.), (2), p. 303-304, pl. 26, fig. 20a, b, eta pragiehge- (Singleton 1932), Singleton, 1945. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 56, {1.3.), yp. 257. Cueullaea proelonga Singleton, Cotton, 1947. Rec. 5, Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 658. Diagnosis—Less inequilateral thai corioensis, less tumid, tatio anterior ta posterior part of hinge greater than 1. Dimenstons—Length 61'S, height 51, inflation (right valve) 21 mm.; Jength anterior to hinge 7°5, of hinge 42°5, posterior to hinge 11-5; maximum height ¢: hinge arom ventral border 43-5 mm. Ratio of anterior to posterior part of hinge 1-13. Type Locality—Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, near Tamilton, Victoria; Lower Pliocene. Location of Holotype—No. 1320 Melbourne University Geology Department. Observations—Cotton (1947) has recorded this species from the Dty Creek Sands, although the exact locality is not specified. He remarks that specimens ane common in the “Adelaidean” and appear to be praelonga rather than cortoensis. With the exception of one sample Irom Kooyonga Bore, the specimens examined satisfy the general criterion for corioeusis established by Singleton (1931, p. 302) ; t.e., the ratio anterior: posterior part of hinge is less than 1. The writer is there- fore in agreement with Singleton that Adelaide examples are corioensis, It seems possible that one true species only is represented, and that praelonga is, as originally described, merely a subspecies of corimensis. A wider range of specimens, numerically and geographically, should be examined to determine statistically whether two species are present or not. Matertal—1 valve, Kooyonga Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Lower Pliocene and Dry Creek Sands. Geogruphical Distriintion—Gippsland, Victoria; Adelaide, South Australia. Family LIMOPSIDAE Genus Limopsis Sassi, 1827 Limopsis Sassi, 1827. Giorn, Ligust., 1, (5), p. 476. (Trigonocaela Nyst and Galeotti, 1835, Bull. Acad. Roy, Bruvelles, 2. p. 289.) (Peclunculina VOrbigny, 1844. Pal. France, Cret., 3, (Lam), p. 182.) (Cosmetapsis Rovereto, 1898, Atti Soc Ligust., 9, pp, 162, 177.) Type species (s.d, Gray, 1847) Arca aurita Brocchi Subgenus Limopsts s, str. (Mersipella. Tredule, 1931. Ree. Aust. Mus., 18, p, 203.) Limopsis (Limopsis) beaumariensis Chapman pl. 5, fiz, 7 Fusmopsis forskah A. Adams. Tate, 1897, Trans, Ray. Soc. S. Aust. 21, p, 38 Limopsis forskali A. Adanis. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec, Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2), , #122 (in part), p, 138, 146. Limopsis beatimariensis Chapman, 1911. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 23, (4,5.), (2). p. 423-5, pl. 84, _ fig. 6; pl. 85, fig. 12. reece sare Chapman. Chapman, Crespin, and Keble, 1928. Ree. Geol, Surv. Vict., » (1), p. 152. Timopsis beawmariensis Chapman, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust, 55, p. 150. Lhmopsis afinitahs Chapman. N. H. Woods, ibid, Limopsis beaumariensis Chapman. Crespin, 1943, Min. Res. Surv. Bull, 9, p. 93. Diognosis—Subtrigonal, hinge line strongly arched; sculptured with. slightly undulatmg primary riblets with from 0 to 4 secondary riblets between, crossed by less conspicuous growth lines, 24 Dimensions—Length 21, height 20°25, inflation (1 valve) 6, length of hinge line 9-25; height of ligament pit 1-75 mm. Type Locality—Beaumaris, Victoria; Lower Piiocene, Location of Holotype—Geol. Surv. Vic, Coll. Observations—Although some of the “genera” created by Iredale in 1929 and 1931 for species of Limopsis are separable from Limopsis s. str., Verstpella created for Limopsis tenisoni Tenison-Woods appears to have no recognizable morphological chatacters to separate it from the type species Limopsts surite Brocchi. Versipella is therefore considered a synonym of Lumopsis s. str. Material —Twelve valves, Weymouth’s Bore, 2 valves Abattoirs Bore, Stratigraphical Renge—Lower Miocene to Dry Creek Sands, Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria, Adelaide, South Australia, Limopsis maccoyi Chapman pl. 1, fig, 10 Limopsis belcheri Adams and Reeve. McCoy, 1875, Prod. Pal, Vict., 2, p. 25, pl. 19, fig. 8 9, Limopsis forskali Adams. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol, Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 12% 138, 146 (in part). Lyon pais {rae eioon 1911. Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet, 23, (ms.), (2), p. 421-2, pl. 83, & 7 P - y HE. Fimohes sence Chaperan Chapman, Crespin, and Keble, 1923, Rec, Geol, Surv. Vict, 1, +P ‘ Limopsis maccoyi Chapman. Crespin, 1943. Min. Res, Surv, Bull, 9, p. 93. Diagnosis—Shell elongate-ovate, very oblique, radial ornament stronger than concentric, which is waving and fimbriate. Teeth short, curved, comparatively few, at Dimensions—Length 28, height 25, inflation (1 valve) 56, length of hinge “4 mm. Type Locality—? Balcombe Bay, Victoria; Lower Miocene, Location of Holotype—Naitonal Museum, Melbourne. Material—T wo valves, Abattoits Bore. One valve, Tennant’s Bore, Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Vict. — Adelaide, S. Aust, Limopsis eucosmus Verco pl. 1, fig. 11 Limopsis eucosmus Verco, 1907, Trans, Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 31, pl. 219, pl. 27, fig. 2. Limopsis eucosmus Verco, Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, Moll. S. Aust, p- 55, text fig. 30. Diagnosis—Small, orbicular, strongly sculptured with flat concentric nbs of varying width and numerous radia) lirae increasing in number by intereala- tion. Concentrics scalloped by radials and a tubercle generally formed at inter- section. Interspaces depressed and circular. Dimensions—i ength 7°5, height 8, inflation (both valves) 3°25 mm. Type Locality—Off Cape Jaffa, 90 fathoms; Recent. Lacation of Holotype—S. Aust. Mus., Reg. No. 13048. Observations—One valve only belonging to this species, its first fossil record, was recovered from Weymouth’s Bore. Its small size and strong sculpture dis- tinguish it from other fossil species. Material—Hypotype, Weymouth’s Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent. Geographical Distribution—Tasmania to Western Australia- Limopsis (Limopsis) vixornata Verco pl. 1, fig. 12 Limopsis uixornata Verco, 4907. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 31, p. 219, pl. 27; fig. 1. Limopsis vixornata Verco. Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, Moll. $. Aust, 9, 54, fig. 36. 25 Diagnosis—A very small Limopsis, orbicularly oval, smooth but for con- centric growth striae except in the posterior area where the concentric sculpture is crossed by radial striae. Hinge curved with eleven diverging teeth in a con- tinuous series, Dimensions—Length 6:4, height 5-7 mm, Type Localitv—Neptune Islands, 45 fathoms; Recent. Location of Holotype—S. Aust. Mus., Reg. No. D13047. Material—Figured hypotype and one other valve, Weymouth’s Bore, 28 valves, Hindmarsh Bore, Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent. Geographical Distribution—Beachport — St. Francis Island, S. Aust, Genus Lissarca E, A, Smith, 1879 Lissarca Smith, 1879. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., 168, p. 19, pl. 9, fig. 17, (Austrosarepta Hedley, 1899, Proc. Linn, Soc, N.S.W., 24, p. 430.) Type species (monotypy) Lissarca rubrofusca E. A. Smith Lissarca rubricata (Tate) pl. I, fig. 14 Limopsis rubricata. Tate. 18874. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 9, p. 71. Lisserco rubricata Tate, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc, S, Aust. 55, p. 150. Lissarca rubricata Tate. Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, Moll., S. Aust, p. 58, fig. 40. Diagnosis—Obliquely oval, inflated, umbo prominent, sculpture of regular concentric striae, margins of yalves crenulate. Dimensions—length 2-75, height 3, inflation (both valves) 1-75 mm. Type Locality—32 fathoms, Backstairs Passage, S. Aust.; Recent. Location of Holotype—S,. Aust. Museum. Material—Six valves, Hindmarsh Bore; 4 valves, Recent, Vict., B. M. Coll. Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent. Geographical Distribution—Victoria, Tasmania, South Australia to 80 miles west of Eucla, Lissarca rhomboidalis Verco pl. 1, fig. 16 Lissarca vhomboidalis Verco, 1907. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 31, p. 221, pl. 27, fig. 7. Diagnosis—Ovate, rhombotd, incquilateral, about twice as long behind the umho as in front. Three or 4 marginal teeth at anterior, 4 at postdorsal and 3 or 4 obsolete teeth at ventral border. Dimensions—Length 2-4, height 2 mm. Type J.ocality—Macdonnell Bay and Guichen Bay, in shell sand; Recent. Location of Holotype—No. 13050, S, Aust. Museum. Material—Six valves, Hindmarsh Bore 450-487 feet, 3 valves Weymounth’s Bore, Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent. Geographical Distribution—Victoria, Tasmania, South Australia to Mac- Donnell Bay. Family GLYCYMERIDAE Genus Giveyrmeris da Costa, 1778 Glycymeris da Costa, 1778. Hist, Nat. Test. Brit, p. 168. Glycymeris Nicol, 1945. Jour, Pal., 19, (6), p. 6164 (synonymy). Type species (absolute tautonymy) Arca glycymeris Linné Subgenus Tucetona Iredale, 1931 Tucetuna Iredale, 1931. Rec. Aust, Mus., 18, (4), p. 202. Type species (o,d.) Pectunculus flabellatus Tenison Woods 26 Glycymeris (Tucetona) convexa (Tate) Peetunculus convesus Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust, 8, p. 198, pl, \l, fig, 7a, b. Pectunculus conviexus var. Tate, 1890. id. 13, (2), p. 175. Pectunculus convexus ‘Tate and Deunant, 1893, id, 17, (1), p. 224, Pectunculus convexus Tate. Harris, 1897, Cat, Tert. Moll. Brit Maus. 1) p. 342, Glycomeris convera Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Ree. Geol. Surv. Viet, 3, (2), p 122, 138, 146. Glycimeris maceoyt Johnston sp. Chapman and Gabriel, 1914. Proc Rey, Soc, Viet., 26, (ns.), (2), p. d04, pl 24, fig. 5 (vom 1-4). ‘ Glycimeris maccoyt Jotinston sp. Chapman, 1916. Ree. Geol, Surv. Vict, 3, (4), pl, 67, fig. 5 (non 1-4), f Glycimeris convexu Tate sp, Chapin and Singleton, 1925, Trans. Roy, Soc. Vict, 37, (ns), CL), p. 38, pl. 2, fig, loa, 1h b, 17-20; pl. 4, fig. 12, 13. Glycimeris convera Tate, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 55, p. 150. Glycymeris convexa Tate. Crespin, 1943. Min. Res. Surv. Bull, 9, p. 93. Tucetona crama Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 8, €4), p, 660, pl. 20, fg. 1, 2 Diagnosis—Solid, tumid, with about 24 rounded clevated radial ribs crossetl by thick concentric waving laminae. Dimensions—Length 31, height 33, inflation (both valyes) 22 mm. Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Pliocene, Location of Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, Observiations—This species is fairly common in the borings in the Adelaide district. Chapman and Singleton noted (1925, p. 38) in Adelaide vxatnples a tendency to flattening of the ribs and development of concentric sculpture; on these features Cotton has raised the new species cram, Dlattening of the ribs ig nat, however, a diagnostic or constant feature; all specimens from Weymouth's Bore show very little if any flattening, while some topotypes have flattened tibs ; vor is the development of the concentric sculpture a uniform characteristic, either in the Weymouth’s Rore specimens under present consideration or in Muddy Creek topotypes: Increasing convexity with age is usual in the species. Juveniles are generally only slightly convex, while gerontic specimens cant be extremely so. The feature is characteristic also of the type species G. glvwewneris (Line), as exemplified in a range of samples from the Red Crag of the English Pliocene in the collec- tion of the Geological Survey of Great Britain, The mode of preservation and the difference in habitat between Adelaide and Muddy Creek shells is here also taken into consideration in accepting Chap- man and Singleton’s determination of the species. Maferial—Three topotypes, Muddy Creek, L4827, 1.0592, B.M. Coll,; seven yalves Weymouth’s Bore, numerous valves Hindmarsh Bore. Stratigraphical Ratige—t.ower Pliocene and Dry Creek Sands, Geographical Distribution—Gippsiand, Victoria. — Adelaide, South Australia, Subgenus Tucett..a Iredale, 1939 Tucettdhe Tredale, 1930. Bare. Reef Exped, Scient, Reps. Brit, Mus, Nat. Hist, 5, (f), p. 300. Type species (original designation) Glycyineris capricornea Hedley Glycymeris (Tucetilla) tenuicostata (Keeve) Pectunculus lenuicostatus Reeve, 1843, Proc. Zoul, Soe, Lond. p. 80. Pectunctdlus tenuicostutus Reeve, 1843, Couch, Icon. 1, pl. 6, fig. 35. Pectunculus tenwicostatus Reeve, Lamy, 1912, Journ. de Conch, 59, p_ 103-8, pl 3, Ag. 3 Glycimoris deesionrtete Reeve, Gath! and Gubriel, 1910 b. Proe. Roy. Soc, Viet, 23, (hs) (1), p. 9% Glycyneris tenuicostata Reeve sp. Chapman and Singleton, 1925, Proc, Roy. Sav. Viet, 37 (ns.), (1), p 30-7. Glycymeris denuicostota Reeve. N. Uf, Woods, 1931. ‘Trans, Rov. Soc. 'S, Aust, 65, p. 150. Glycymeris tenuicostata Reeve. Crespin, 1943, Min, Res. Surv. Bull. 9, ja B43, Tucetilla yota Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 8 (4), p. 659, 27 Diagnosis—Rounded, moderately inflated, surface ornamented, with 4045 riblets tranisversed by concentric growth threads which become beaded where they eross the radial costae. Dimensions—Length 29-8, height 28-8, inflation (both valves) 19 mm. Type Locality— Australia”; Recent, Location of Holotype—B.M. Coll., No. 1950-6-6-1-3. Observations—The species Tucetilla reta is identical in shape and sculpture and the number of hinge teeth, the described diagnostic characters, with the holotype of Glycyimeris teniicostata. G. tenuicostata has been found consistenly from Balcombian to Werrikeoian in southern Australia, It is recorded from Abattoits Bore, and one example from Hindmarsh Bore, a young and worn shell length 8, height 7 mm., is undoubtedly tenuicosfata. The species is represented in the British Museum by specimens other than the holotype having the following dimensions : Length 32, height 32, inflation (both valves), 20 mm. Length 29-8, height 27, inflation (both valves), 18 mm. Length 19, height 17 mm., inflation not measured as specimen glued to tablet. Material—Holotype: Three complete specimens, Brit. Mus. Coll.; 1 valve Hindmarsh Bore, 17 valves Abattoirs Bore. Stratigraphical Range—-Miocene to Recent. Geographical Distribution—Quecnsland — South Australia. Suborder SCHIZODONTA Superfamily PTERIACEA Family PTERIIDAE Genus Prncrapa. Réding, 1798 Pinciada Réding ex Bolten 1798. Mus. Bolt, (2), p. 166. Pinctada Thiele, 1935. Handb. Syst. Weicht., -p. 803 (synonymy). Type species (s.d. Iredale, 1915) Mytilus snargaritiferus Linné Pinctada ¢rassicardia (Tate) Meleagrina crassicardia Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. 8, p. 121-2, pl. 9, fig. 6, 10, tharos pyar Prenqearit Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1905. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict. 1, (2), Pinctada crassicardia Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 150. Pinctada crassicardia, Tate. Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 8 (4), p. 660. Diagnosis—Slightly oblique, hinge line long, straight, anterior ear of Jeft valve short, tumid, acute, of right valve depressed ; posterior wing, small pointed. Surface with distant growth striae. ' Dimensions—Yoting example: Length of hinge 37, greatest length measured from umbo to post-ventral margin 37 mm, Average sized adult specimens mea- sure 60 mm. in length, Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Lower Pliocene, Location af Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. ; AMfaterial—One large broken valve, Tetinant’s Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Gippsland. Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. Family PINNIDAE Genus Pryna Linné, 1758 Pinna Linné, 1758. Syst. Nat, ed. 10, p, 707, Type species (s.d, Children, 1823) Pinna rudis Linné. Subgenus Arrina Gray, 1847 Atrinag Gray, 1847. Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond., p, 199. Type species (monotypy) Pinna vexulum Born, zs Pinna (Atrina) semicostata Tate Pinna semicostata Tate, 1886 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 8, p, 122, pl. 12, fig. 9. Pinna semicostada Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Ree, Geol, Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p. 138 Alrina Semicostata. Tate. Cotton, 1947, Rec, S, Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 650. Dimensions—Length of dorsal matgin 130, width 65, inflation (both valves) 43 mm. Type Locality—Adelaide; Pliocene. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll. Univ. of Adelaide, T997, Observations—It is somewhat difficult to tell whether Tate’s type is a Pinna s.str. or an Atrina, althongh the shape suggests Atrina. The writer fol- lowed Winkworth (1929) and Thiele (1935-) in the use of Atrina as a sub- genus, It is separable from Pinna only on the absence. of the internal medial angulation and the resultant division of the muscular impression. Material—Ilolotype Tate Mus. Coll. T997, Stratigraphical Range—South Australian Pliocene, Geographical Distribution—Aldinga—Adelaide, South Australia. Family OSTREIDAE Genus Osrrea Linné, 1758 Ostrea Linné, 1758. Syst. Nat, ed. 10, p. 696, Type species (s.d, Children, 1823) Ostrea edulis Linné, Subgenus Lop#a Roding, 1798 Lopha Réding ex Bulten, 1798, Mus, Bolt., 2, p. 168, ype species (s.d. Dall, 1898) Ostrea cristegalli Gmelin ie Bolten mid Roding, 1798. Eames, 1951, Phil. Trans, Roy, Soc, ser. B. 627, 235, p. 342 synonymy). Ostrea (Lopha) hyotidoidea Tate pl. 5, fig. 1 Ostrea hyotis Linné. Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust, 8, p. 96, pl, 6, fig. $. Osteen Kyotis Linné. Dennant, 1889. Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Anst., 11, p. 49. Ostrea kyotis Linné, Harris, 1897, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus, 1, p. 299. Ostrea hyotidoidea Tate, 1890, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 12, p. 268, Ostree kyotidoidea Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol, Surv, Vict. 1, (2), p, 11K Ostrea hyotidoidea Tate, Crespin, 1943, Min. Res. Surv. Bull. 9, p. 94. Lopha hyotidoidea (Tate). Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 601. Diagnosis—Irregular, with flattish radial ridges crossed by foliaccous scales, sometimes somewhat spinose, Type Locality—River Murray Cliffs; Lower Miocene. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide. T880, Description of Hypotype—Shell of moderate size, fairly solid, irregularly subquadrate, with several irregular flat obtuse radial folds. crossed by numerous irregular and waving foliaceous concentric scales which are sometimes slightly spinose. Margins of valves expanded, not plicated. Umbones depressed, resilifer broad, triangular. Left valve convex, Déimensions—Length 65, height 60 mm. Hypotype—B.M. Coll. No. 6581, Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, Victoria Observations—This long-ranging species is not uncommon in some borings in the Adelaide Basin. None of the specimens ayailable are larger than about 65 mm. The species resembles the nepionic stages of O. hyotts Linné, but of the examples examined only the holotype shows a tendency to the sharply angular plications of the adult hyotis which ate diagnostic of the subgents Lopha, Material—Holotype: Two valves Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, L6581, One specimen River Murray Cliffs. 48803 B.M. Coll.; numerous specimens Abattoirs Bore; 2 valves Hindmarsh Bore, - Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene, 29 Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria. — Adelaide, South Aus- tralia. Subgenus OsTrea s.stt. Ostrea (Ostrea) arenicola Tate Ostrea arenicola Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 8, p. 97, pl. 10, fig. 6. Osivea ayenicola Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv, Vist., 1, (2), p. 158. Ostrea angast Sowerby, ibid., p. 145. Ostrea arenicola Tate. Cotton, 1947, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 661. ; ; Diagnosis—Solid, valves unequal, lower valve with depressed radial ribs and foliaceous lamellae; upper valve smaller and flattish, with imbricating lamellae. Dimensions—Length 85, height 80, inflation (both valves) 25 mm. Type Locality—Aldinga, South Australia, Pliocene. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide. T921, 1 Observations—This oyster is common and numerous at the richly fossilifer- ous level in the Adelaide Basin. It is distinct from the Ostrea startiana of the River Murray Pliocene. Material—One valve, Aldinga Bay, S. Aust, 110523, B.M. Coll. Ntimerous valves, Hindmarsh Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene, Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria. — Adelaide, South Aus- tralia. Superfamily TRIGONIACEA Family TRIGONIIDAE Genus NeotraicontaA Cossmann, 1912 Neotrigonia Cossmann, 1912. Ann. de Paleo. 7, (2), p. 11. Type species (0.d.) Trigonia pectinata Lamarck Neotrigonia trua Cotton Neotrigonia acuttcostata McCoy. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 55, p. 150. Neotrigonia irua Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 661-2, pl. 20, fig, 5-6. Diagnosis—Shell trigonal, convex, with about 28 radiating ribs closely set with numerous lamellose tubercles, Dimensions—Length 26, height 25 mm. Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene. Location of Holotype—S. Aust. Museum. P. 8360. Observations—N. trua is distinguishable from its nearest fossil ally N. acuticostata by its more trigonal shape, and by its greater convexity par- ticularly in the umbonal region, Thete are 28 ribs generally in N. trua compared with 32 in N. acuticostata. N. trua would appear to be intermediate in form between the Cheltenhamian-Kalimnan acuticosfafa and the Recent South Aus- tralian bedvalli which has 26 ribs, Material—Holotype: Four topotypes, Abattoirs Bore. Siratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands. Geographical. Distribytton—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide. Suborder ISODONTA Superfamily PECTINACEA Family PECTINIDAE Genus CuLamys Roding, 1798 Chlamys Réding ex Bolten, 1798. Mus. Bolt. p. 161, Type species (s.d. Hermannsen, 1847) Pecten tslandicus Muller Subgenus CuLamys s.str. akin Tredale, 1929 cc, ibid., p. 162.) Mimachlaymys Iredale, 1929 c, ibid., p. 162.) {Belcklamys Iredale, 1929, ibid. p. 164.) Ww Chlamys (Chlamys) polyaktinos sp. nav, pl, 4, By. 16 Chlamys peront Tate. N. 11. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soe S. Aust, 65, (1), p. 150. Diagnasis—Suborbicular, with from about 24 increasing by intercalation to 48 narrow riblets carrying imbricating scales with shagreen sculpture in the interspaces, Description of Holotype—(Iett valve), Shell small, rather thin, elongately suborbicular, slightly convex, sculptures with about 24 radial riblets, increasing by intercalation to 48 towards the ventral margin, of sub-equal strength, covered towards the ventral margin with imbricating scales. Interspaces finely shagreened. Auricles unequal, posterior auricle small, dorsal margin nearly horizontal, with about 10 fine rays with imbricating scales; anterior auricle larger, dorsal margin oblique, primary rays five with two secondary rays, crossed by fine growth lamellae, not scaly ; byssal sintis moderately wide and deep. Dimensions—Length 22, height 23-5, inflation (one valve), 3 mm. Tape Locality—Ahattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene. Location of Hulotype—Vate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. F15120. Observations—Although it resembles it fairly closely, this species is not the Balcombian C. peront (Tate), from which jt is distinguished easily by the shagreen sculpture between the ribiets. It is close to the Recent Cy aktines Petterd, from which it differs in the more numerous riblets and in shape, being fess elongate. The posterior atiticle is larger than in akiinos, Material—tlolotype and 16 paratypes, Abattoirs Bore (single valves). One valve Hindmarsh Bore, two fragments Tennant’s Bere, Stratigvaphical Range—Dry Creek Sands. Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District. Chlamys (Chlamys) antiaustralis (Tate) fl. 5, fig. 21 Pecten usperrimus yar; Tate, 1882. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust. 4, 1 44. Pecten antiaustraliy Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 8, p. 106, pl, 9, fig. Zac: Pecten antjanstralis, Vale. Harris 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll, Brit. Mus., 1, p. 315.6 Pecten antiaustralis Tate, 1899. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 23, (2), p 269. Peeten antioustrals Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree. Geol, Sury. Viet, 1, (2), p. 13% Chiamys usperrimus antiuustralis (Tate, 1886) Gatliff and Singteton 1930, Proe, Rey, Sue. Viet, 42, (ns.), (2), p. 71-3, pl. 2, fig. 3; pl. 3, tig. G, 7; pl. 4, fig. 10a, b. Chlamys antiaustralis Tate, N. Ho Wools, 1931. Trans Roy, Soc, S, Aust, 55, p. 150 Mimachlamys antiaustralis Tate. Cotton, 1947. Rec. S, Aust. Mus, 8 (4), p. 655. Diagnosis—Suborhicular, with ahout. 25 radiating ribs flanted by one or two smaller ribs on each, ribs convex, wider than in C. asperrima crossed by erect lamellae. Ears large, unequal; atterior esr of right valve with finer and more numerous radial ribs than in asperrini. Himensions—Length 58, height 58, inflation (both valves) 25 mtn. Type Locality—Aldinga Bay, South Australia; Pliocene, Location of Halotype--Tate Mus, Coall,, Univ. of Adelaide. Observations—Examination of a series of specimens of Chiamys islandica (Muller), type species of Chlamys, of C. axperrima Lamarck, type species of Mimachiamys and of P. opercularis, type species of Aeguipecten with which Thiele has synonymized Mimachionrys, sufficiently indicates that there is no sub- generic distinction hetween Mimachlamys and Chlamys. The broad essential differences between islandica. and tsperriaad are the somewhat unequal sculpture between the valves in islandiva, and the marked serration of the ventral margin, wilh corresponding interlocking of the yalves, in asperrima, The latter is, however, a variable feature and occurs to a modified degree in some specimens of isiandica; it is a specific character dependent upon the degree of development of the primary tibs. In asperrima they are strongly RD | and sharply developed, in islandica the subsidiary ribs become larger and separate from the primary ribs, Opercularis is a round, broader sheil with an undulating rather than a serrated margin. Viewed in profile the ventral margins appear thus: Ventral margin of C. asperrima = DB PAARAAN Ventral margin of C. opercularis =~ ANNAN SL Ventral margin of C. islendica - - A OS a Other features considered by Iredale to be diagnostic of Mimachlaniys are shared by all three species, The relative convexity of the valves is slightly variable, but the tight valve is flatter than the left in all three. The genus Chlamys s.str. is represented in the New Zealand Tertiary by 17 species (Marwick, 1928, p. 453) ranging from probably late Oligocene, The writer has not seen actual specimens of C. chathamensis Marwick (1928, p. 456, figs. 18, 19), but from the figures the species appears to be generically comparable whih asperrtia. In the European Tertiary, the genus s.str, is represented by the Chlamys varia series (C, varia, C. costai, C. justiana, C. jaklowectana, C, muitistriata, C. islandica, and G. princeps (Roger, 1939, p. 150-172, pl, 27, pl, 28, figs, 1-6) while tslandica forms a connecting ink between European and North American faunas. The genus s.str. is represented in the post-Miocene of the Red Sea region by C. squamosa, C. squamaia, C. senatoria, and C. senatoria var. alexandri (Cox, 1929, p. 190-1), Iredale (1939, p. 350) has placed senatoria in Monachlamys, thus sugresting its synonymy with Chlamys. Material—Numerous specimens, Hindmarsh Bore 450-487 fect, 2 valves Thebarton Bore, 11 valves and fragments Kooyonga Bore, 3 valves Adelaide, 42698 » 2 valves Muddy Creek L 6579, 1 valve South Australia. 33789 B.M. Coll. Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Western Victoria — Adelaide, South Atistralia. Subgenus Eouicuramys Iredale, 1929 Equichlamys Iredale, 1929c, Rec, Aust. Mus, 17. (4), 9. 162. Type species (o.d.) Pecten bifrons Lamarck Chlamys (Equichlamys) consobrina (Tate) Pecten consohrinus Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 8, p. 104, pl. 3, fig 6. Pecign consobrinus Tate, Tate and Dennant, 1893. id, 17, (1), p. 224, Perten conshrinus Tate, Harris, 1897. Cat, Tert. Moll, Brit. Mus., p. 317, Pecten consobrinus Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903.-Rec, Geol. Sury. Vict, 1, (2), p, 133, Pecten consabrinus Tate. N. H. Woods 1931. Trans. Ray. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 150. Equichlamys consobrinus Tate. Cotton 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 654, Diagnosis—Subinequivalve, with 8 radial folds and about 100 rigid, unequal riblets separated by minutely granular interspaces usually broader than the riblets, Dimensions—I ength 85 height 85 mm. : Type Localtity—Aldinga Bay, South Australia; Pliocene. J,ocation of Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll., Univ of Adelaide, Material—Several fragments. Abattoirs Bore; several fragments, Tennant’s Bore; 3 valves, Aldinga Bay, 5. Aust. L,10533, L.9919 (iopotypes) B.M, Coll, Stratigraphical Range—South Australian Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Aldinga Bay — Adelaide, South Australia. Subgenus Mesorerituaw Iredale, 1929 Mesopeplum Iredale, 1929. Rec. Aust. Mus., 17, (4), p, 163. Type species (o.d.) Mesapeplum cayoli Iredale 3a Chlamys (Mesopeplum) incerta (T, Woods) pl, 5, fig. 8, 9 Pecten coarclatusy (7) Sturt, 1833, Two Exp. §. Aust, 2, p 254, pl 3, fig. 13. Pecten coarctatus (7) Tenison Woods, 1862. Geol. Obs. S. Aust, p 76. Pecten incertus ‘Cemson Woods, 1867. Proc, Phil, Soc. Adel, for 1865, (2), p, 1, pl i, Ge, LL Pecten polymorphuides Ziitel. Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust. 6 p, 1f3, pl, & fig. 2, Pecten bolymorphoides Zittel. Tate and Dennant, 1893. id., 17, (1), p 224. Pecten polymorphoides Zittel. Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, 9, 316. Pecter polymorphaides Zittel. Dennant and Kitson 1903, Ree: Geol, Surv. Viet, 1, (2), » 120. Diagnosis—Inequivalve, left almost flat; valves with 5-7 broad folds with numerous bifurcating radiating ridges crossed by fine waving evenly spaced stales. Dimensions—Length 44, height 40, inflation (both valves) 16 mm. Type Locality—? River Murray Cliffs; ? Lower Miocene, Lecation of Holotype—Not known at present. Observations—This is a very variable species not previously recorded from the Adelaide Pliocene. Four right and two left valves were obtained from Wey- mouth's Bore. The fossil species resembles C. (M_.) caroli Tredale from New South Wales more closely than the South Australian species €. (M.) triggt, Cotton and Godfrey. It is easily distinguished by its almost flat left valve, its Ke broad folds with their numerous ribs crossed by fine waving, evenly spaced scales. Matertal—Six valves, Weymouth’s Bore, 310-330 feet; 2 valves Bairnsdale L341. 1 valve Muddy Creek L4815 B.M. Call. Stratigraphical Range—l.ower Miocene to Pliocene, Geographical Distribution—Port Phillip Bay, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. Genus Lentrpreten Marwick, 1928 Lentipecten Marwick, 1928. Trans. N.Z. Inst, 58, p. 455. 5 Type species (0.d.) Pecten hochstetters Zittel Lentipecten adelaidensis sp. nov. pl. 1, fig. 13.4, b, ¢ Amusinin hochstetiers Zittel. N. TT. Woods, 193L. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 55, p. 150. Diagnosts—Thin and fragile, compressed, both yalves smooth except for fine microscopic growth striae externally, apical angle 105° increasing to 120°. Ears subequal, anterior ear rayed, separated from valve by byssal notch and somewhat scaly; posterior ear broad, obtuse, smooth, Deseription—Right valve, juvenile. Shell of moderate size, thin, fragile, smooth except for growth striae; equilateral except for ears, somewhat higher than long. Apical angle 105°. Dorsal margin slightly concave, Ears unequal, broken in the holotype, dorsal margin slightly oblique upwards, posterior ear smooth, anterior ear tayed with five weak rays, somewhat scaly or roughened from in- cremental ridges, with a byssal notch which docs not form a radial ridge. Hinge margin natrow internally, intersected by resiliary pit. No ctenolium. Shell smooth internally, musciilar impression sub-circilar, Dimensions—Length 11°3, height 12, inflation (one valve} 1 mmm, Paratypexs—Hinge portion of right and left valves of adults, with ears nearly complete. The posterior ear of the tight valve is of moderate length, slightly oblique on the dorsal edge, then rounded towards the posterior extremity with which it makes an angle of about 120°, Anterior ear somewhat roughened and scaly, with fairly deep byssal notch. Apical angle about 120°. Both ears of the left valve are smooth and apparently subequal. Estimated dimensions of the artule shell are length and height about 30 mm. Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocche. mano of Holotype and Paratypes—Tate Mus. Coll, Univ, of Adelaide. * 15121. 33 Observations—The several species previously known as Pecten hochstetteri have had a very chequered history in both Australia and New Zealand, The history of the synonymy of the New Zealand Miocene hockstetter: has been clearly explained by Marwick (1928, p. 450), and in the same publication (p. 455) Use genus Lentipecten is raised and described. P. hochstettere Zittel, as delimited by Hutton being cited as type species, Pseudamussium hutiont Park is a synonym of hockstelteri, Park haying overlooked Hutton’s delimitation, and the ribbed form figured by Zittel (1864, pi. 11, fig. Sb) is Serrtpecten polemicus Marwick (1928, p. 451). Lentipecten parki Marwick from the New Zealand Eocene is closely related. The Australian species, wilh exception of an early erroneous identification by Tenison Wonds (1876, p. 2, pl. 1, fig. 5) as Pectea plewronectes Gmelin, has, until recently, also been known as P. hockstettert. Tate (1886, p. 114) compared Australian with New Zealand examples, redescribed the smooth species, and “with certainty” announced the identity of the Australian shells with the New Zealand huchstettert. Marwick (1924b, p. 320) stated on erroneous grounds following Park and at that time rejecting Hutton and Tate, that the Australian species wae not Aechstetlert becaiise it had two smooth valves, but that only careful com- parison of a number of specimens would determine whether the Australian species were P. Astitons (f¢., Lentipecten hochstetteri in the correct sense) or not. This error has recently been revived by Crespin (1950, p. 151), who has evidently overlooked Marwick’s later references to hochstettert and has separated the Australian “Janjukian” shell from hechstettert on the grounds that it has two smooth valves. There is little doubt that the Australian species victoriensts Crespin is distinct, although not for the reason given, Although wictoriensis is identical in general appearance with hochstetteri, it has differently shaped ears; in the left valve of Aockstetteri the cars have a straight horizontal dorsal margin; in tictoriensis the margin ts oblique to convex upwards and the margin is serrated as in the right valve af L. parkt Marwick. The byssal notch in the anterior ear of the right valve seems stronger in hochstetteri. L. hochstettert is equiyalve, while in wictortensis the right valve is gently convex, the left almost flat. The present species adelaidensis,. also previously identified as hkochstetteri and still known tmastly from fragmentary material, is distinguishable from wictoriensis by its lower apical angle (120° as against 130° in victoriensis), and by the ears. The ears are relatively large in adelatdensis and straight dorsally, while the dis- crepant ornament on the ears is diagnostic. Matertal—Holotype, 2 paratypes (incomplete valves), 2 portions of para- types, Abattoirs Bore. Adelaide. 1 fragment Tennant’s Bore. Stratigraphical Ranye—Dry Creek Sands, Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District. Genus Proreanussium de Gregorio, 1884 Propeamtssiam de Gregoria, 1884. Natural. Sicil, 3, p, 19. (Ctenammusium. Iredale, 1929b. Rec, Aust, Mus,, 197, (4), p. 164) Type species (monotypy) Pecten (Propeamussinm) cecilioe de Gregorio. Propeamussium atkingoni (Johnston) Amusium Atkinsont Johnston, 1880, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas. for 1879, p, 44. Pecten Zitteh Hutton, Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 8, p. 115, pl 7, fir. Sac, Amusium alkinsont Johnston, 1888. Geol. Tas, pl. 31, Ge. 15, 15a. Peeten sitteli Hutton, Tate and Dennant, 1893. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aush, 17, (1), p. 224. Amussium siltel Watton, Tate and Dennant, 1895. Jd, 19, (1), p. 112. Amussium sitteli Hutton (sp.). Harris, 1897, Car. Tert, Moll, Brit, Mus, t, 9, 324 Amussium sitteli Hutton. Tate,1899. Trans. Rey. Soc. S. Aust, 23, (2), p, 272. Amussium sittels Hutton, Dennant and Kitson, 19901. Rec, Geol. Surv. Viet, 1, (2), p. 120. Anmussinm atkinsont Johnston. Marwick, 1924 Rep. Aust, Ass. Ady. Sci, 16, p. 318 Ere sepersrss Nadal (Johnston). Chapman and Singleton, 1927. Prot Roy, Soc. Viet, 39, n8.), p. 117. Ctenamusium athinsoni (Jolmston). Cotten, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8 (4), p, 660-1, 4 Diagnosis—Very small, equivalve, interior of valves concave, shining, with nine to eleyen ribs which terminate truncately near the margin. Exterior of right valve with varying reticulate sctulpttres, leit valve concentrically striated. Pimenstons—Length 4, height 4 mm. Type Locality—Table Cape, Tasmania. Location of Holotype—? Hobart Museum. Observations—This species was recorded for the first time from the Adelaide Pliocene at 330 feet in the Salisbury Bore by Cotton, 1947, Material—-20 valves, Muddy Creek, L 9876, B.M. Coll. Stratigraphical Range—? Oligacene to Pliocene. Geograpltical Distribuéion—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia, Genus Hinnitrres Defrance, 1821 Hinnites Defrance, 1821, Dict, Sic, Nat, 21, p. 169, Type species (s.d, Blainville, 1825) Hinnites corlesyi Defrance = QOstrea crispa Grocchi Hinnites corioensis McCoy Flinnites corioensis McCoy, 1879. Prod. pal. Vict., 6, ». 31, pl. 58, fiz. 1-5 a. FHinnites corioensis MeCoy, Tate, 1886a. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 8, p 116. Paecten deformis Tate 1887b, id., 9, pl. 18, fig, 4, Hinntles corioensis McCoy. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree. Geol. Sury. Viet, 1, (2), p 120. Hinnites corinensis McCoy, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 150, Hinnites corioensis McCoy, Crespin, 1950, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 60, p. 152, pl. 15, fig. 13. Diagnosis—Young stage regular, ovate, with valves ornamented with inter- calating ridges; adult stages irregular, upper or left valve flatter than right valve. Dimensions—Length of large specimen 3-5 inches, height 3-5, inflation 1 to 2 inches, Type Locality—Corio Bay, Victoria, Location of Holotype—Vict. Mines Dept. Coll. Material—Six fragments, Abattoirs Bore. Strotigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene. Geagraphical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. Family SPONDYLIDAE Genus SponpyiLus Linné, 1758 Spondylus Linné, 1758. Syst, Nat, 1, ed. 10, p. 690. Type species (s.d, Fleming, 1818) Spondylus gaederopus Linné Spondylus spondyloides (Tate) pl. 2, fig. 1 Pecten spondyloides Tate, 1882. Trans. Roy. Sov. S. Aust., 5, p. 44. Pecten spondvloides. Tate, 1886, id, 8, p. 112, pl. 4, fie. 6. num fi. 7. Spondyles aldingensis Tate, 1896. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 20, (1), p. 120. Spondwus aventcola Tate, 1896. Rep. Aust. Ass. Adv, Sci, 6, p. 318 (Cnet, mul, Spondvius arenicola Tate, 1899. Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Aust. 23, (2), p. 275. Spondylus arentcola Tate, Dennant.and Kitson, 1903, Rec, Geol. Surv. Vict. 1, (2), p. 138, $43. Shondylus avenicola Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aunst., 55, p. 150. Shondylus xpondyloides Tate, Cotton, 1947, Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 8, (4), p. 655, Ptagnosis—Shell_ equilateral, inflated, with seven to nine primary ribs, between each pair of which there are two or three secotidary and a variable number of tertiary ribs, all more or less spiny: Dimensions—Length 44, height 44, inflation (both valves) 34 mm. Type Locality—Aldinga Bay, South Australia; Pliocene, Lacatian of Syntypes—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. T956, T948 A-D. Observations—Although Tate (1896, 1899) changed the specific name on account of its inappropriateness with the transfer to the genus Spondylus, the original spondyloides, in accordance with the Infernational Rules of Zoological Nomenclature, must stand, 35 Material—One valve, Weymouth’s Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands. Geographical Distribution—Adelaide, South Australia. Family LIMIDAE Genus Linta Cuvier, 1798 Lima Cuvier, 1798. Tabl. Elem, Hist. Nat. Anim., p. 421. Type species (tautonymy) Ostrea lima Linné Lima bassi Tenison Woods Lima bassit: Tenison, Woods, 1877. Pap. Roy. Soc. Tas, for 1876, p. 112, Liwnia peas Tesnsas Woods, Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy, Soc. 5, Aust, 8, p. 117, pl. 5, fig. 8; Linier Bases Tenison Woods, Tate and Dennant, 1893. ad. 17, (1), p. 224. Lima bassii ‘Tenison Woods. Tate and, Dennant, 1895. id. 19, (1), p. 112. Tima bassii Tenison Woods, Pritchard, 1896, Proc. Roy, Soc. Vict., 8, (ns), p. 128. Lima bassi Tenison Woods. Harris 1897. Cat. ‘Tert. Mall Brit, Mus. p. 130. Lima Oar petieon Woods, Dennant and Kirson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Sury. Vict, 1, (2), Absirolima ‘basst. Tenison Woods. N, HT, Wouds, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 151, Laima bassit Tenison Woods. Crespin, 1943, Min. Res. Stirv. Bull, 9, p. 93. " Diagnosis—Obliquely suhovate, rayed with about 25 imbricately sqtuamose ribs. Dimensions—Length 22, height 27 mm. Type Locality—Table Cape, Tasmania. Location of Holotype—Hobart Museum, Tasmania. Observations—Lima bassi belongs to Liaa s.str. It is not here imtended to investigate Recent species beyond their bearing on the present fatina, but the {following comments are offered upon the genera into which South Australian tnembers of the family have been placed (Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, pp. 104- 109). Austrolima Lredale, 1929, is not separable from Lime in the generic sense (see also Thiele, 1935, p. 811), while Mantellum (type species, designated b, Gray, Ostrea lima is a direct synonym of Lima (see also Winckworth 1930, p. 116). Materivi—Eleven specimens, Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, 14820, L9840, B.M, Coll. 1 valve, Table Cape, writer’s collection. Stratigraphical Range—t? Oligocene to Pliocene, is Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Aus- tralia. Superfamily ANOMLIACEA Family ANOMIIDAE Genus Anomra Litiné, 1758 ‘Anomia Linné, 1758. Syst. Nat, 1, ed. 10, p. 700. ' Type species (s.d. Children, 1823) Anomia ephippium Tinne Anomia tatei Chapman and Singleton pl. 4, fig. Placunanamin tone Gray. Tate, 1890.2. Trans. Roy Sov. 8. Aust, 13, (2), p. 175. Placuianovia ione Gray. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 145. yrs tahoe Rr and Singleton, in Chapman, Crespin, and Keble, 1928, id. 5, (1), p. 99, pl, Ll, ng. 7/4, bh, Monia ione Gray, N. H, Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust, 55, p. 150, Anomia tatei Chapman und Singleton. Crespin, 1943. Min, Res. Surv. Bull, 9, p. 92. Monia tote: Chapman and Singleton, Cotton, 1947, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p, 654. Diagnosis—Surface unevenly cotivex with depressed radial threads narrower than the interspaces, crossing concentric undulose growth lines. Trregular ovate muscle scar heneath anterior end of chondrophore; large subcentral area with three muscle scars. 36 Dimensions—Probable length of shell when complete 60, height 50, inflation (one valye) 10 mm. Dimensions of muscular impressions, length 18, height 26 mm. Type Locality—Grange Burn, near Hamilton, Victoria; Pliocene. Location of Holatype—Geol. Surv. of Vict. Coll. Observations—Cotton has listed this species with the statement “Recorded as Placunanomia ione Gray”. It is not clear whether this is intended to apply only to Adelaide specimens or to those recorded from numerous localities and listed by Dennant and Kitson (1903, pp. 118, 138, 145). Materiel—The figures hypotype and 34 other specimens, Abattoirs Bore. One valve, juvenile, Weymouth’s Bore, Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. Suborder DYSODONTA Superfamily MYTILACEA Family MYTILIDAE Genus Bracuinontes Swainson, 1840 Brachidontes Swainson, 1840. Treat. Malac., p. 384, (Brachyodontes Agassiz, 1846, Nom. Zool. Ind. Univ., p. 51.) Type species (0,d.} Modiola sulcata Lamarck Brachidontes hirsutus (Lamarck) pl. 4, fig. 15 Mytilus. hirsuius Lamarck, 1819, Hist. Nat. Anim. s. Vert.,, 6, (1), p. 120, Trichomya. hirsuta Lamarck. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans, Roy Soc. S. Aust, 5S, p. 150, Diagnosis—Strongly curved, ornamented with fine, close, bifurcating riblets. Dimensions—Height 60, width 26 mm. Type Locality—“New Holland” y Recent. Location of Holotype—Mus. Hist. Nat., Paris. i Material—Holotype; the figured hypotype and one other valve, Abattoirs ore, Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent. Geographical Distribution—New South Wales to Great Australian Bight. Order ANOMALODESMACEA Superfamily LATERNULACEA Family MYOCIIAMIDAE Genus Myanora Gray, 1840 Myadora Gray, 1840. Ann. and Mag, Nat. Hist., 25, p. 306. (Ayodora Gray, 1840. Syn. Cont. Brit. Mus., ed. 42, p. 150.) Type species (monotypy) Pandora brevis Sowerby Myadora alea Cottan Myadora ovata Reeve. N. H. Woods, 1931. ‘Trans. Ray. Soc. 5. Aust., 55, p, 150. Afyadora alea Cotton, 1947. Rec. S, Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 665, pl. 20, fig, 20, 21, 22. Diagnosis—Subovate, sculptured with about 36 concentric ribs in 11°5 mm., left valve smaller, less strongly sculptured. Dimensions—Length 19, height 15 mm. Type Locality—Salisbury Bore, 330 feet, South Australia; Pliocene. Location of iZolot\pe—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. T1728. Observations-—This species is very close indeed to the Indo-Pacific M. ovata Reeve, The only diagnostic difference lies in the number of concentric ribs which are 30 in ovata and 36 in alea (30 according to Cotton's description). The posterior hinge is slightly more curved in ale. M. ovata is thinner and the external ribs tend to be more conspicuously shown on the interior of the shell. Material—T wo valves, Abattotrs Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands, Geographical Distribution—Salishury and Abattoirs Bores, South Australia. v7 Myadora tenuilirata Tate Myadora tenuilirata. Tate, 1887b. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 9, p. 174, pll 17, fig. 9a-b. Myadora tenuilirata Tate. Tate and Dennant, 1893. Trans. Roy, Soc., S. Aust, 17, (1), p- 225. Myadora tenuilirata Tate, Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll, Brit,, Mus., (1), p, 390. Myadora tenuilirata Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec, Geol. Surv. Viet, 1, (2), 9. 127, 139. Myadora tenuilirata Tate. N. H. Woods, 1951. Trans, Roy. Soc, S, Aust, 55, p, 150. Diagnosis—Elongate-oblong, left valve flat, ornamented with close-set fine, concentric ridges crossed by waving radial threads. Dimensions—Length 16, height 10, inflation (both valves) 3 mm, Type Locality—Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Miocene. Lacation of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T1197. Material—Three valves, topotypes. L9910, B.M. Coll. Stratigraphicol Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene. ; Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. Myadora corrugata Tate pl. 1, fig. 17 Myadora corrugata Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 9, p 175, pl, 17, fig. 11 a-t. Myadora corrugata Tate. Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll, Brit. Mus. 1, p. 391, Myodora corrugata Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2) mp 199. Myadora corrugata Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 150. Myadora corvugata Tate, Cotton, 1947, Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 8, (4), p. 655, 5 Pragnoeie Tegel ovate, with about 20 distant concentric ridges. Left valve flat. Dimensions—Length 18, height 14:5, inflation (both valves) 4 mm, Type Locality—Upper beds, Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Pliocene. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide, T1192, Material—Five valves, topotypes. L4809, L9911, B.M. Coll., 2 whole valves, 2 portions, Weymouth’s Bore. Stratigraphica] Range—Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—-Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia, Section ADELOSIPHONIA Family PANDORIDAE Genus CLEIDOTHAERUS Stutchbury, 1830 Cleidothaerus Siutchbury, 1830.- Zool. Journ, 5, (17), p. 97. Type species (monotypy) Aspergillim strangei Adams Humphreyia strangei (Adams) Asperoilium strangei Adatns, 1852, Proc, Zool. Soc. Lond, 20, p. 91, pl. 15, fig. 5. Hamphreyia stranget Adams. Tate, 1890, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. for 1889/90, 13, n, 174. Humphreyia strangei Adams. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), 147, Eiakpheeyia strangei Adams and Angas. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 56, p. 150. Diagnosis—Tube squarely rounded, obtusely keeled; valves squarely ovate, Material—Holotype, B.M. Coll.; portion of sheath, Abattoirs Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent. Geographical Distribution—New South Wales to Hardwicke Bay, South Austraha. Homphreyia incerta (Chenw) nic al incertume Chenu, 1842. Illust. Conchyl. i, Aspergillum, p. 4, pl 4, fig. 5, Sa, 4, a 2. Diagnosis—Tube short, rounded, variously agglomerated, disc perforated by several apertures with tubes up to 4 mm. in length, Type Locality—Swan River, Western Australia; Recent. Location of Holotype—-British Museum (Natural History). 38 Material—Holotype, B.M. Coll., Portions of disc, Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide, Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent. Geographical Disiribution—South Australia. Family CUSPIDARIIDAE Genus Cusrrparra Nardo, 1840 Cuspidaria Nardo, 1840. Atti. Ruin. Sci. Ttal., 1, p. 175. (Neaera Gray, 1839. 8th Rep, Brit. Ass. (Neweastle) non Robineau-Desvoidy, 1830.) Type species (monotypy) Tellina cuspidata Olivi Cuspidaria subrostrata Tate Neaera subrostrata. Tate, 1887 b. Trans, Roy. Soc. $. Aust. 9, p. 177, pl. 15, fig. 2 a-b, Cuspideria subrostrata Tate (sp.) Harris, 1897, Cat, Tect. Moll. Brit, Mus., (1), p. 389. Cuspidaria subrostrata Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec, Geol. Surv. Viet, 1, (2), p. 127, Cuspidaria subrosirata Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc, S, Aust. 55, p. 150, Diagnosis—Moderately conyex, anterior dorsal margin slightly convex and sloping, posterior dorsal portion longer, less oblique, moderately concave. Orna- mented with coarse concentric growth lines becoming lamellose at umbo and rostral insinuation, Dimensions—Length 18, height 9, inflation (one valve) 3°5 mm. Type Locahtyx—Muddy Creck, Hamilton, Victoria; Lower Miocene, Localion of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, Material—Three topoty pes, Muddy Creek, 14810, L9845, B.M, Coll. 4 frag- ments Abattoirs Bore, Stratigraphical Ranye—Lower Miocene to Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia, Onler TELEODESMACEA Suborder DIOGENODONTA Superfamily ASTARTACEA Vamily CRASSATELLIDAE Genus EucrassaTet.a Iredale, 1924 Fucrassatella Iredale, 1924, Proc. Liun, Soc, N.S.W., 49, (3), 197, p. 203. Type species (o.d.) Crassatella kingicola Lamarelk Eucrassatella camura (Pritchard) pl. 5, fig, 4 Crassalellu oblonga T. Woods. Tate, 1890. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 13, p. i75, Crassatellites oblonga T. Woods: Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Ree. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), C ‘asputetiigs camurus Pritchard. 1903. Proc. Roy, Soc: Viet, 15, (2), p. 96, pL 14, fig. 5, Crassatellites oblonga T. Woods, N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust,, 55, p. 151. Suerossatella camura (Pritchard). Cotton, 1947. Res. S, Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p, 662. Diagnosis—Size tedium, anterior very short, posterior attenuated, umbo strong, broad, medially depressed. Slightly to deeply concave posterior to beaks, ventral margin very slightly convex, medial portion usually straight. Dimensions—Left valve length 54, height 41, inflation (one valve) 14 mm. Right valve length 55, height 37, inflation (one yalve) 12 mm. Type Locality—Grange Burn, Victoria; Pliocene. Lacation of Syntypes—Melb, Univ. Geol. Dept., Nos. 1761-1766. Material—Numerous valves, Hindmarsh Bore, 1 broken specimen Wev- mouth's Bore, 1 valve, Kooyonga Bore: 8 valves upper beds Muddy Creek, 14834, L6601, L9851, B.M. Coll, Stretigraphical Range—Ptiocene. Geographical Distributioa—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia, a9 Eucrassatella kingicoloides (Pritchard) pl. 5, fig. 6 Grusspleliites Binorecnlniies Pritchard 1903. Proc, Roy, Sec. Vict, 15, (2), p. 94, pl. 13, fig. 1, 2, 3, ; Eucrassatellis kingicoloides (Pritchard), Singieton, 1945, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 56, (2), ({ns.), p. 257, 258, Eucrassatella Fingiculvides (Pritchard), Crespin, 1950, id. 60, (ms.), p. 153, pl. 14, fig. 6 (lapsus calamt for kingicoloides). Diagnosis—Broadly ovate, rather inflated near umbos but becoming de- pressed ventrally and posteriorly. Posterior dorsal margin deeply concave to a short straight posterior truncation. Ventral margin regularly convex. Umbos strong aud tumid. Shell shallow internally. Dimensions—Leneth 69, height 54 inflation (both valves) 36 m1. Type Locality—Jemmy’s Point, Kalimna, Victoria; Lower Pliocene. Location of Holotype—Melb. Univ. Geol. Dept., No. 1756. Observations—The two species. of Fucrassatella listed above were originally classified as H. oblonga, Cotton (1947, p. 662) has observed that the Adelaide species is not qttite like E. oblonga nor quite like E. camura and figures a specimen approximating more closely to camura, Specimens from Hindmarsh Hore are -, camura, while those from Kooyonga Bore include both camura and Ringicolotdes. In the British Museum a tablet of specimens identified as C. oblonga. from Muddy Creek, con- tains four examples each of what were later described as kingicoloides and camura respectively. Both species occur logether at Jemmy’s Point and in the Dry Creek Sands, Moterial—One complete leit valve, 3 portions, Kooyonga Bore. Stratigraphical Raugé—Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. Genus Cuna Hedley, 1902 Cuna Hedley, 1902. Mem. 4 Aust. Mus., p, 314. Type species (o.d.) Cuno concentrica Hedley Cuna polita (Tate) pl. I, figs 15 Carditelia polita Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 9, p. 158, pl. 20, fig. 20, 21. Corditella polite Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p. 124, 139. Cuna pohta Tate. N. £1. Woods, 1951. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, ». 151. Diagnosis—Trigonal, slightly inequilateral, inner ventral margin crenulate. Dimenstons—Length 2:5, height 2°5 mm. Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; ? Miocene. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. Material—Three valyes. Hindmarsh Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Miocene and Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia, Cuna aporema Cotton Cuna aporema Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 8, (4), p. 6f2. Diagnosis-——Subtrigonal, higher than long, smooth except for growth striae, inner ventral margin without crenulations. Dimensions—Length 4°25, height 5 mm. Type Locality—Bore 41, 405 feet-407 feet: Pliocene. Location. of Holotype—S. Aust. Mus., P8407. Material—One specimen, Tennant’s Bore, Stratigraphical. Range—Dry Creck Sands. Geographical Distribution—Adelaide Plains. al) Superfamily CARDITACLA Family CARDITIDAE Genius Carpita Bruguiére, 1792 Cardita Bruguiére, 1792, Ency. Meth. Vers. (1), p. 401. ' Type species (sd. Fleming, 1818) Cardita variegate Bruguiére. Cardita compta (Tate) pl. 2, fig. 2 Mytilicardia conipta Tate, 1886, Trans, Roy. Soc, 5. Aust., 8, p. 149, pi. 12, fig. 2. Mytilicordia compta Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol, Surv. Vact., 1, (2), 9. 123, 138. Cardita compta Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy, Soc S, Aust, 55, p, 151, Cerdita compia (Tate). Cotton, 1947. Rec, S. Aust, Mus., 8, (4), p, 654, Diagnosis -— Posterior side narfow; 15 narrow scaly ribs consisting of 7 anterior ribs, 4 primary ribs, then 2 narrow posterior ribs followed by 2 com- pressed elevated ribs. Dimensions—Length 29, greatest height 17, height at umbo 12 mm. Type Lacality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Pliocene. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll,, Univ, of Adelaide. Matepial—Four valves. Weymouth’s Bore, 2 valves, Abattoirs Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Cheltenhamian”™ to Dry Creek Sands. Geographical Disiribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. Cardita subdeceptiva sp. nov. pl, 4, fig. 14 Cardita preissi Menke. Tate. 1890.a. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 13, p. 175, Curdita preissi Menke. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, {2}, p 146. Cardttu pretsst Menke. N. H. Woods, #931. Tratis, Roy. Suc. S. Aust. 55, p 151- Cardita compta Tate. Cotton 1947. Rec. ‘SS. Aust. Mus, 8, (4), p. 663, Diagnosis—A. fairly large Cardita rectangularly ovate, moderately convex, with 14 radial costae, 3 on the depressed posterior area, followed by 4 larger and approximately equal costae, then 7 costae gradually descending in size towards the anterior border. Interspaces wide, deep with steep sides; on the anterior portion the ribs are more or less nodylose, hut the nodules fade out on the dith rib from the posterior border, Kihs and interspaces crossed by frequent concentric growth lamellae. Description of Holotype—Shell rectangularly ovate, solid, fairly thick, umbones slightly convex incurved, prosogyrate, situated at about one-sixteenth from the anterior border, Posterior rnargin elongate, posterior side somewhat expanded towards the ventral border but flattened in a long triangular area below the dorsal margin. Surface sculptured with 14 axial costae, of which there are 3 narrow costae in the depressed posterior area, follawed by 4 larger approxt- mately equal costae in the umbo-post-véntral area, then 7 gradually decreasing in size towards the anterior margin. Interspaces decp, wide, with steep sides; sibs more or less nodulose in the anterior portion, but nodules gradually becoming obsolete on about the fifth rib from the posterior border; tibs and interspaces crossed by frequent, crowded, concentric growth striae. Inner margin of shell coarsely crenulate in conformity with the external ribs, hinge oblique to the ventral margin, damaged in the holotype. Dimensions—Length 32, height 24, inflation (one valve) 12 min. Type Localitty—Dry Creek Bore, Adelaide District; Pliocene. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, F 15122. Observations—This species very closely resembles Cardita incrassata Sowerby = C_ preissi Menke) with which it was formerly identified. However, C, incras- sata has 16 radial costae wider than the interspaces which are narrower than those of C. subdeceptiva. C, subdecepltiva is broader than GC. morasseta. Tt has fewer 41 costae than the Jemmy’s Point species C, kalimnae (Pritchard) with 19 ribs of which the posterior are scaly. Material—Holotype and five paratypes, Dry Creek Bore. Stratigraphcal Range—-Dry Creek Sands. Geographical Distribution—Dry Creek, Croydon, and Abattoirs Bores, South Austriala. Genus GLans Megerle, 1811 Glans Megerle, 1811. Ges Nat. Fr. Berlin, Mag. 5, (1), p 68. Type species (monotypy) Glons trapezia = Venus trapezia Linné Glats spinulosa (Tate) pl. 4, fig. 1 Cardita spinulosa Tate, 1886, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 8, p. 153, pl. 2, fig. 3, Cardita spinulosa Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 123, 139. Venericardia spinulosa Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust., 55, p. 151. Diagnosis—A rotund-cordate Glans with high, tumid umbo; sculptured with 22 prominent, narrow, spinose ribs. Dimensions—Length 33, height 31, length of anterior side 9, inflation (both valves) 36 mm. Type Locality—Blue clays, Schnapper Point, Victoria. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ, of Adelaide. Observations—The hinge of sptnulosa is that of Glans. The figured hypotype has the prominent laterally compressed costae of typical spinulosa, but the spinose character disappears ventrally and the costae become lamellose. This, according to Chapman and Crespin (1933, p. 68) is the principal diagnostic feature of their variety dennanit described below as a separate species. In Adelaide specimens at feast the degree of platiness of the adult sculpture does not appear to be diag- nostic of spinulosa, although in dennanti the ribs are always lamellose towards the margin. The two species are distinct in shape; spinulosa is more inflated, shorter, with more prominent and tumid umbo. The costae of spinulosa are very prominent and in the hypotype the interspaces, where they are not lamellose, are finely shagreened. Material—Hypotype, Abaitoirs Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. Glans dennanti (Chapman and Crespin) pl. 2, fig, 6 Verericardia spinitlosa (Tate) var. dennanti Chapman and Crespin 1933. Trans. Roy. Sor, Vict. 46, (1), p. 68, pl. 5, fig. 5, 6. Veneritestia sfinulosa. var. dennanfi Chapman and Crespin, 1943, Min. Res, Surv. Bull., 9, p. * Diagnoses—A Glans, rectangularly ovate, not inflated, with 23 radial costae bearing imbricating, scarcely-elevated spines at regular intervals. Towards the yetitral margin the spines are less regularly disposed and the ribs become lamellose, Anterior margin short and geritly rounded, post dorsal margin oblique then descending at an angle of 120° before curving to the ventral border, Posterior area flattened. Dimensions—Length 24, height 19-5, inflation (ome valve) 8 mm, Type Locality—(Tlolotype) Old Bunga-road, east of No. 1 bore, Lakes Entrance, East Gippsland, Victoria. Location of Holofype—Commonwealth Collection, Canberra, No. 53. Loculity af Hypotype—Wevmouth’s Bore, Adelaide, 310-330 fect. Lecition of Hypotype—S, Aust. Mines Dept. Coll, 42 Observations—Originally described as a variety of spinulosa this ts a distinct species from spiulosa, from which it differs in shape, inflation and sculpture. The dentition is that of Glans s.str, (Chavan, 1941, p, 99); the right hinge determinable from a broken specimen orily having a weak AT, a weak 3a, a very strong 3b and a weal PIT. ; Shotld the species described by Tate and Basedow, 1902, as Carditu dennants prove also to be a Glans, Chaprnan and Crespin’s species will need a new name, Pending examination of the hinge of “Cardtic” dennanti to locate the species more acctirately the name of the present species is not altered. Material—The hypotype and 3 left valves, portion of 1 right valve, Wey- mouth's Bore, Adelaide. Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. Genus PLevROMERrs Conrad, 1867 Pleuromerisy Conrad, 1867a, Amer. Jour. Conch, 3, p, 12, Type species (monotypy) Cardita tridentata Conrail, Pleuromeris subpecten =p. noy pl. 2, fig. 3 Diagnosis—A stall Pleuromeris, triangularly ovate, somewhat depressed, with 17 tadial costae, equal to interspaccs, bearing mtumerous elongated oval granules. Description of Ilolotvpe—Left valve. Shell triangularly ovate, moderately depressed but evenly convex. Umbo slightly elevated acute, at about two-tilihs from anterior border, moderately incuryed and prosogyrate. Sculpture of 17 sharply defined radial costae with straight sides, abotit equal to the interspaces bearing numerous (about 5 per mm.) elongate-oval granules crossing the whole of the rib and projecting over the interspaces. Hinge fairly narrow, with a long F Il, a long and well-developed 4b, a small but high 2 and a small A IL, the pit between 4b and 2 is small and narrowly triangular. Margin of valye crenulate, corresponding to external ribs. Dimensions—Length 5°3, height 4-8, inflation (one valve) 1°6 mim, Type Locality—Weymouth’s Bore 310'-330’. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll. F 15125. Paratype—Right valve. Like the holotype, hinge with AL weak, 3b promi- nent and triangular, with a broad base, PTT small, Dimensions—Length 5°2, height 4-7, inflation (one valve) 1-4 mm, Observations—Pleurameris subpecten differs from P, pecten principally in the number of radial costae, subpecten having 17, pecten 22, The posterior slope in subpecten is not flattened and the shell is evenly convex throughout. Material—Holotype, paratype, 5 topotypes, Wevmouth’s Bore. 18 specimens Hindmarsh More. Stratigraphical Ranye -Tyry Creek Sands. Geographical Mistribution —(lindmarsh and Weymouth's Borers, Adelaide. Pleuromeris pecten (Tate) Cardita pecten Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy, Soc. 5. Aust. 8, p. 151, pl. 2, fig. 11. Cardita pecten Tate. Dennant and Kitson. 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Viet., 1, (2), p. 139, Menericaria pecten. Tate. N, TT, Woods, 1931- Trans. Roy, ‘Soe. S. Aust, 55, p. 151. Fenertcardia pectes Tate. Cotton, 1947, Rec. S. Aust. Mus,, 8 (4), p. 654. Liagnosis—A very stall Pleuroweris, ovately triangular, depressed, with 22 compressed crenately granose ribs. Original Nescription—Shell oyately triangular, transverse, rather depressed, regularly convex, except tlie flattened posterior slope; tmbones small, acute, 43 antemedian, directed forwards; anterior margin of valves coarsely crenulated. Surface ornamented with 22 narrow, compressed, crenately-granose, radial ribs; interspaces flat, wider than the ribs. Dimenstons—Length 6°5, width 2, length from umbo to posterior angle 6°5, inflation (both valves) 3 mm. Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hanzilton, Victoria; Pliocene. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. Material—Your valves Weymoauth’s Bore, 6 valves Hindmarsh Bore. Stratigraphical Renge—Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Mnddy Creek, Victoria — Adelaide, South Aus- tralia. Pleuromeris trigonalis (Tate) pl. 2, fig. 4 Cardita irigonalis Tate, 1886. Tratis. Roy: Soc. 'S. Aust, 8, p. 151, nl. 2, fg. 1. Curditfa frigonalis Tate. Denoant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol. Sury. Viet, 1, (2), p. 123, 139. Venericardia trigonalis Tate. Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 8, (4), p. 655, Diagnosis—Triangular, with 15 nodulose ribs, _ Original Deseription—Shell triangular, moderately convex, umbones elevated, slightly oblique incurved, anterior posterior margin inclined, making with the slightly arched ventral margin a roundly acute angle; anterior side rounded; dorsally excavated. Surface ornamented with 15 crenately-nodalose, rounded, radiating ribs, the interspaces wider than the ribs with transverse thick Jirae. Inner margin of valves coarsely crenulated, Dimensions—Length 7, height 6°5 mm. Type Locality—Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay; Pliocene, — Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll, Univ. of Adelaide. Material—Four valves, Weymouth’s Bore. Stratigraphical Range—(?) Miocene; Pliocene of South Australia. Geographical Distribwtion—(?) Gippsland, Victoria —- Adelaide, South Australia Genus CyctocArpra Conrad, 1867 Cyelocardia Conrad, 1867 b. Amer, Journ, Conch., 3, p. 191. Type species (monotypy) Cyclocardia borealis Conrad Subgentis ScaLaricarpDIta Sacco, 1899 Scealaricordita Sacco, 1899, Moll. Terr, Terz. Piem., 27, p. 22. Type species (monotypy) Venericardia scalaris Sowerby Cyclocardia (Scalaricardita) subcompacta Chapman and Crespin pl, 2, fig. 5, & Penevicardia subcompacta Chapman and Crespin, 1928. Ree. Geol. Surv. Vict., 5, (1}, p 102, pl. 5, fig. 21; pl. 11, fig. 80 Femericardia subcompacta Chapman and Crespin, N, H, Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust, 55, p. 151. Veenesiitcia subcompacta Chapman and Crespin. Crespin, 1943, Min, Res. Surv. Bull. 9, p. Diagnosis—Subttigonal, about as high as long, with 25 ovately beaded ribs. In the juvenile the radial sculpture is obsolete in the umbonal area and the con- centric striae are produced anteriorly. Dimensions—Length 2°5, height 3-2 mm. Type Locality—Sorrento Bore, Mornington Peninsula, 605 ft: Lower Pliacene, Location of Holotype—Geol, Sutv. Vict. Coll, Material—T wo figured hypotypes and 23 valves, Weymouth’s Bore. Stratigraphical Range—“Mitchellian” to Dry Creek Sands, Geographical Distvibutton—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. 44 Subgenus AucrureLurns Chavan, 1951 Arctirellina Chavan, 1951, Compt. rend, Soc, Geol., France, 12, p, 210. (Arcturella Chavan, 1941, Journ, de Conch., 84, (1), p, 100 mom Sars, 1897.) Type species (0.d.) Menericardia asperula Deshayes Cyclocardia (Arcturellina) hindmarshensis sp. nov. pl. 2, fig. 9 Lyagnosis—A small Arcturcllina, mflated, subtrigonal, with 19 radial costae carrying in the earlier stages oval-shaped imbricating tubercles, and in the latter stages icregular imbricating growth lamellae crossing ribs and interspaces with- out interuption. Desciption of Holotype—Right valve, Shell fairly small, thick solid, sub- trigonal, inflated. Utibo subcetitral, high, incurved, prosogyrate, smooth at tip. Sculpture of 19 radial costae, equal to the interspaces, bearing in the early stages oval tubercles almost completely crossing the costae and in the later stages irregular imbricating prowth lamellae crossing ribs and interspaces without interruption. Lunule broad, cordate, smooth except for prowth striae, Escutcheon long and smooth, well marked. Hinge very heavy, strongly curved; 3a well developed, 3b strong; P lil damaged in holotype, otherwise high, Inner margin heavy, ctenulate. Dimensions—Length 8°5, height 9, inflation (one valve) 3-5 mm, Paratype—Left valve, of which hinge is figured. Dentition PIL (weak), 4b and 2 strong and projecting, AIT fairly high, Type Locality—Hindmarsh Bore 450-487 feet; Pliocene- serene of Holatype and Puratype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. F . Observations—The specics hindmarshensis is close to C, (4.) gippslandica (Chapman and Crespin). It is, however, a smaller shelf with a different sculp- ture, The tibs in gippslandica ate beaded in the early and intermediate stages and lamellose in the later stages. At no stage has gippslandica the imbricating oval tubercles of hindmorshensts. The subgenus Arcturellina to which hindmarshensis and peridonea, below, belong is represented in the European Eocene and Paleocene by the species (all of Deshayes asperula (Lutetian) atzensis (Montian and Cuisian), prevosti (Cui- sian), pulchra (Cuisian), ambigua (Lutetian) and serrulata (Lutetian). (Chavan 1941, p. 100). It is the Indo-Pacific subgenus of the otherwise typically American Cyclocardia and has apparently one surviyor in “Venericardia’ bimaculata Des- hayes in Tasmania at the present day. (Chavan, 1949, p. 512), Material—Holotype, paratype, and one topotype, [lindmarsh Bore, four specimens Weymouth's Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands. Geographical Distribwtion—Hindmarsh and Weymouth's Rores, Adetfaide. Cyclocardia (Arcturellina} peridonea sp. nov. pl. 2, fiz. 7 Diagnosis—Triangularly ovate, not inflated, stall, fairly solid, with 18 ribs bearing imbricaling scales. Description of Holotype—Lett valve. Shell small, fairly solid, triangularly ovate. Umbo moderately inflated, directed anteriorly, incurved, fairly prominent. Dorsal margin straight, and sloping posteriorly, somewhat excavate and then more steeply sloping anteriorly. Both posterior and anterior margins rounded; anterior narrower and slightly directed dorsally while posterior margin is rounded with a direction towards the ventral margin. Ventral margin deeply curved. Surface sculptured with 18 radiating ribs, a little broader than interspaccs, covered with narrow imbricating scales which tend to become platy towards the 45 ventral margin, Interspaces flat with fine and thin lamellae approximately corre- sponding to the scales on the ribs. Internal ventral margin coarsely crenulated. Hinge with teeth 4b and 2 widely divergent. Lunule impressed, smooth, elongate- cordate. Dimensions—Length 8-5, height 8-0, inflation (one valve) 2:8 mm. Type Locality-~Hindmarsh Bore, 450-487 feet; Pliocene. Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. F 15125. Observations—C, peridonea is closest to C. gippslandica; it has fewer ribs, which are imbricate-scaly rather than tuberculate. The shell is smaller and less produced towards the umbo, which lacks the prominence of gippslandica. Material—Holotype, paratype, 9 topotypes Hindmarsh Bore; 24 valves Wey- mouth’s Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands. Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District. Family CONDYLOCARDIIDAE Genus Conpvrnocarpta Bernard, 1897 Condylocardia Bernard, 1897. Journ. de Conch. 44, (3), p. 169, Type species (0.d.) Condylocardia sanchipauli Bernard Condylocardia tenuicostae Chapman and Gabriel pl. 1, fig. 18, 19 Cc ondylccaries fenuicostae Chapman and Gabriel, 1914. Proc. Roy. Soc, Vict, 26, (1), 2), 30 Condylocardia. kemuatetistag Chapman and Gabriel. Chapman, 1916. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict. 3 1: ), Pp. ? Condylocardia tenuicostae Chapman and Gabriel, Chapman, Crespin, and Keble, 1928, Rec. Geol. Sury. Vict, 5, (1), p. 156. ; Condylocardia tenuicostaeé Chapman and Gabriel. Crespin, 1943, Min. Res. Surv. Bull, 9, p. 92. Diagnosis—Broadly triangularly ovate, sculpture of about 36 marrow de- pressed riblets dying out in the umbonal area and crossed by concentric prowth lines. Dimensions—Holotype (left valve), length 2°15, height 1-77 mm- Type Locality—Bore No. 10, 310-320 feet, Mallee Bores near Ouyen, north- west Victoria, Lecation of Holotype—Geol, Surv. Vict. Coll. Material—One yalve, Hindmarsh Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Miocene to Pliocene. Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia. Superfamily ISOCARDIACEA Family SPORTELLIDAE Genus SportetLa Deshayes, 1858 Stortella Destayes, 1858, Anim, s. Vert. Bassin de Paris, 1, p, 593. Type species (c.d.) Psammobia dubia Defrance Sportella jubata Hedley pl. 1, fig. 20 Sportella jubata Hedley, 1909, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 34, (3), p. 428, pl. 37, fig. 22-23. Sportella jubute Hedley. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 55, p. 151. Diagnoses—Subthomboidal, longer than high, sculpture of fine, radiating threads increasing by intercalation. The lateral threads increase rapidly and diverge sharply at the umbho-post-ventral and antero-ventral angle and curve - (5) L h where k has been teplaced by its equivalent in h, and w by E, Expressed in specific terms (5) becomes: Q E,,=h E fa 2a“ , —fa} - - *% . - (6) 1 where E,, is the rate of evaporation in inches per month of 31 days, h is the coefficient of heat transfer in cal./em*/hr./°C, Q is the nett gain of radiant energy in cals./em.2/hr., pa is the atmospheric humidity expressed as the partial pressure of water vapour in mm, of mercury, fa. ; i air temperature and Xg is a function of temperature (see Table 1). By a coincidence the numerical constant of equation (6), for the specific combitiation of units and rates, is 1°O and hence no numerical constant is shown. Strictly Xe is referred to the temperature of the water, but as this is one of the unknowns the appropriate values are found from the air temperatiire 6a . This is admissable in practice since under most natural conditions the tem- peratures of the air and water are close together and X,» changes only slowly with temperature. 102 Taste I values of Ng for values of @ for water Temperature (4) Xp Temperature (@) Kg eC *{; 5 > - - - 0-361 1% ~ - - - 0317 G - - * ~ 0349 19 - - os - 0-317 7 - - - - +341 20 - - - - 0-318 S- =~ = = O334 21 - - = = 0326 9 - - - - 0-328 2z - - - - +322 wm - - - - 324 23 - - - - 0324 ll - - - - 0-320 a- (C - - 0°326 12 - - - ~ 0-318 25 - - - ~ 0-328 i - - - ~ 317 26 - - - ~ +330 14 - - - - 0-316 27 - - - ~ 07935 15 - - - - 0-315 28 - - - - 0335 l@ - - - - 0-315 29 - - - - 0°337 17 - - - - 0-316 30 - - - - 0-340 Equation (6) is for the steady state where no term for heat storage is necessary, and hence no allowance is made for the constantly varying conditions and the changes in stored heat so characteristic of natural conditions. Ferguson has shown, however, that equation (6) gives reasonably accurate results when the mean yalues of the meteorological data are used providing that the pond is shallow and that the period of time consideted is at least two or three days. CALCULATING THE RATE oF EVAPORATION Equation (6) has been used in calculating the monthly rate of evaporation for the appropriate stations listed in Pamphlet 42 of the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research (1933). The appropriate meteorological data provided in this pamphlet are the mean monthly values for maximum and minimum tem- peratures and for relative humidity. Two hundred and ninety stations are repre- sented in the calculations. The values so obtained haye been entered on a map of Australia and appropriate lines of equal evaporation drawn for the two months of January and July. In view of the possible early publication of ip-to-date nortals for these meteorological factors and in view of the fact thal the calcula- tions were intended primarily to be a test of the Ferguson equation, it was. not considered desirable at this stage to carty the calculations further so as to include all months of the year. The basic climatic values have been derived and handled as follows: Nett gain of radiant energy—This quantity Q includes radiation of two types—short-wave solar radiation and long-wave atmospheric radiation. [nsolation reaching the water surface suffers a small loss by reflection, the balance entering the water where it is assttmed to be fully absorbed. The water surface radiates out long-wave energy almost as a black body, but this loss is partly offset by a downward streatn of long-wave radiation from the atmosphere, Insolation ts frequently measured by means of the solarimetric thermopile, but very few regular measuremetits are made of atmospheric radiation and this is usually estimated from meteorological data using empirical formulae like those listed by Brunt (1944) and more recently by Anderson (1952). In Australia there are so few direct measurements of insolation available that for the purpose of this paper the quantity has been derived from relative sunshine, using for this purpose maps supplied by the Commonwealth Meteorological Branch, of the duration of sunshine for January and July based in part on sunshine recorders AUSTRALIA ——— 42 87 une —— | ts RELATIVE SUNSHINE "iy JULY a et Tig. 2 and in part on observations of cloudiness. These two maps of relative sunshine are illustrated in figs, 1 and 2. Black, Bonython and Prescott (1954) have shown that the insolation reach- ing the earth’s surface can be calculated from relative sunshine by means of the equation: n =atb— - - - - - - - - - (#7) a N where Q is. radiation actuaily received, Q, is the theoretical radiation for an aitless earth (Angot’s value), # is the actual duration of sun- shine and NV is the maximum possible duration of sunshine, In these calculations for Australia the parameters in this equation for the observa- tions at Dry Creek, South Australia, have been selected, namely a =0-3 and b=0°5, There is a suggestion in some of the detailed records examined that the parameter @ varies with latitude, but this 1s not confirmed by the broader statistical analysis of the wider records. The loss by reflection on clear days in temperate latitudes is small and is practically constant throughout the year. It can be approximately corrected for ” cloudiness by multiplying by relative sunshine —. N 104 The nett loss of long-wave radiation is allowed for in a simple manner by taking into account cloudiness and humidity but not air temperature. The com- bined short-wave and long-wave expression appropriate for the calculation of nett radiation received is: n (Oz Pa O=0°3 —|—-+— -114) -1 - ~ 8 Q, +— (= +: (8) where Q is the nett gain of radiant energy for a horizontal surface in cals./cm.?/hour. P | AUSTRALIA eo) ESTIMATED NETT Hanes RECEIVED Sia CALS /CM?/ HR. 17-0) is JANUARY Geos + C+ ie-irs)- 7s he g | =e ir a a ee See, ae 2 Fig, 3 Air temperature—This quantity 0a is the mean of the mean monthly maxi- mum and minimum teniperatures. It is expressed in degrees Centigrade. Humidity—This quantity pe is derived from the mean temperature as defined above and the relative humidity. It is expressed as mm. of mercury. Heat transfer coefficient—This parameter fh is interchangeable with the mass tranfer coefficietit Rk. It is preferable to use the former because its value on an hourly basis is conveniently close to unity under most conditions of natural evaporation. These transfer coefficients are empirically related to horizontal wind speed, and for the present purposes the value of ft is based on the relation- ship to wind velocity found by Bonython (1950) for the standard Australian tank evaporimeter three feet in diameter, In view of the difficulties of obtaining 105 records of wind velocity over the continent, B. Mason) calculated the mean wind speed for a height of one metre by extrapolation from the geostrophic wind, using as check points the wind speeds measured by Dines anemograph at the main Australian airports. This pattern of wind spced expressed in terms of the parameter h was presented in the form of maps for January and July. E. L. Deacon“? has confinned the admissability of this procedure in refer- ence to certain wind stations on Salisbury Plain in England. For January the value of A ranges from 1-8 near to Cape Leeuwin to less than 0:75 in parts of the interior, for July the values range from 1-2 to 0°8, ra IN [A Ht a ‘ = ; i ESTIMATED NETT RADIATION RECEIVED 1 | CALS AMER. Fay / ~ jury gros cerge-nat-i| | | __|% f Se Fig. 4 | pease pera jj P25 je ee es ; a= 1 Maps of the nett guin of radiant energy and of the rate of evaporation derived from. the equations (8) and (6) are given in figs, 3, 4, 5 and 6 for the two months concerned. The observed and calculated values of evaporation for 41 evaporimeter stations are given in Table 2. For a number of these it has been possible also to list the evaporation calculated from the normal published values of saturation deficit, using the “Waite formula” of the Commonwealth Weather Bureau. © @} Privately communicated in each case. 106 TABLE 2 Comparison of observed and calculated evaporation for January and July JANUARY JULY Qbseryed ~ Calculated Calculated Observed Calculated Calculated * LOCALITY from energy from satura- from energy from satura- balance tion deficit balauce tion deficit ins./month ins,/month ins./month ins./month ins./month ins./month Western Australia Chapman ~~ - 11:94 12-80 — 2:47 3°50 — Merredin - - 12:96 12-60 — 2-12 2-10 = Narrogin - - 9-19 12-10 —_ 1-62 1-80 Perth - - 10°37 12-65 8°83 1-76 2:64 2-07 — Marble Bar - 11-00 14-28 18-03 5*60 6°00 7+64 Coolgardie - 12-48 12-11 _ 2-44 2-47 — Eucla - - 6°75 10-20 7+26 2-49 2-84 —_ South Australia and Northern Territory Adelaide - - 9-27 12541 11-33 1-39 2:07 1:88 Alice Springs - 1240 13°35 13+83 3°75 3°73 3:00 Darwin “ - §+28 7°60 3-13 8-23 7°29 4-69 Kybybolite - 7°47 10-00 6°64 1-28 1-50 0-69 Waite Institute - 8:57 10-76 8-44 1-71 1-92 1-93 Yudnapinna - 14-62 12-35 10:61 3-04 2-50 1-91 Queensland Riloela - - 9-39 8-70 7°26 3-66 3-70 2-44 Brisbane - - 6:74 8-90 7-01 2-69 3415 5:76 Rockhampton = - 5-68 9-1 6°95 2°67 3:99 3°26 Gilruth Plains - 14-33 12-25 14-90 3°60 2-84 2:75 New South Wales Burrenjttck - 6-19 9-00 — +85 1-49 — Canberra - 8-84 9-34 7°14 1-33 1-44 1:00 Cowra - - 8-44 9-60 11°52 1-55 1-60 1-25 Griffith - - 9°32 10-13 -- 1-46 1-68 _ Dubbo - - 10°91 10-41 10°26 1:40 1:74 0:95 Leeton - - 8-58 10°46 10-58 1°13 1:63 1-25 Yenda - - 8-91 10-48 — 1°38 1:64 _ Trangie - - 10-40 1085 — 1-68 1-89 —_ Rathurst = - - 7°21 8°79 6°32 1-18 1:60 0-88 Hume - - 7:21 10-07 — 0-87 1-35 — Lake Victoria - 9-48 11-50 8:39 1-57 1°74 1-06 Sydney - - 5+42 8°76 570 1:56 2-06 1:88 Umberumberka - 12-71 12+43 11°89 2-92 2°21 3°13 Walgett - - 8-08 11-15 11-77 2:00 2-26 1:57 Wilcannia - - 9+46 12:71 14:52 1-95 2-17 1-88 Victoria Geelong salt - 6-89 9-14 5-38 1-95 1-52 1-19 Laverton - 7°74 9-17 — 1-36 1-39 = Melbourne - 6-45 9-40 6-39 1-12 1-51 1:13 Merbein - - 9-71 10-38 — 1-78 1-70 _ Rutherglen - 8-63 10-92 — 0°86 1+41 —_ Walpeup = - - 10-56 10-60 —_ 1-37 1-40 _ Werribee - ~ 6:97 9-17 — 1-31 1-39 = Tasmania Cressy - - 5-11 8-81 4-95 0-97 0-85 0-69 Hobart - - 4-84 8-62 5-01 0-94 0-99 1-25 107 DISCUSSION The evaporation map for January (fig. 5) shows mainly concentric lines roughly parallel with the coast, the rate increasing inland. There is a central atea of highest evaporation over the Lake Eyre basin, and a secondary closed system of equally high evaporation in the far west between Latitudes 20° and 30° S. The map for July (fig. 6) shows lines of equal evaporation stretching across the continent, approximately along the parallels of Latitude and showing an increase in evaporation from south to north. The maps show considerable resemblance to the official maps of 1954, so far as the general pattern is con- cerned, with the best agreement for the month of July. The region of greatest. disagreement is Victoria and Tasmania for the month of January, where the evaporation shown in fig. 5 considerably exceeds that of the official maps. These AUSTRALIA « eoete er mene EVAPORATION INCHES PER MONTH JANUARY — E = blag 2 42 7,+8,)~ fal TT —————— Fig. 5 differences are emphasised in the data of Table 2 where the observed evaporations and those calculated from atmospheric saturation deficit are derived as far as possible from the ctrrent meteorological summaries. The differences between the cbserved values and those calculated from the Ferguson equation of energy balance are greater in January than in July, In general, calettlated evaporations are greater than observed evaporations, The discrepancy between observed and calculated evaporation for Victoria and Tasmania needs further investigation, particularly as the calculations from saturation deficit are generally much. closer to the observed values. Certain stations listed in Table 2 were discussed by Foley 108 as recording anomalous values: for evaporation, Of these, Marble Bar, Walgett and Wilcannia record lower values than would be expected from the saturation deficit, and Yudnapinna records much higher values. It will be observed from the Table that these deviations are maintained when the evaporation is cal- culated from the’ Ferguson equation. A first inference is that observations of evaporation for these places are suspect. Another is that the meteorological parameters common to the two processes of calculation are in some way erroneous. AUSTRALIA eee EVAPORATION INCHES PER MONTH =e +2 tq t ba) ~ je Vig. 6 In any case it is interesting to speculate why a calculation based on satura- tion deficit, which involves only temperature and humidity, should correlate so well with one involving also radiant energy and wind, In the first place it should be noted that equation (1) which is used in the calculations involving saturation deficit is a purely empirical one based on the regression equation between observed values for evaporation and saturation deficit, whereas those derived from the Ferguson equation are based more directly on physical principles, with empirical factors relating only to standard meteorological elements. Equation (1) is in fact only a particular case of Equation (2) where k remains constant and fg =}, , that is, the evaporating water is at exactly air temperature. The good correlation can therefore be explained by the fact that, at a given time & (or h) may not vary very greatly over a considerable area of country, and also by the fact that the difference in temperature between air and evaporating water is frequently small over quite a range of natural condi- 109 tions. Another point is that the rise and fall of mean air temperature usually follows closely the rise and fall of the mean rate of insolation, the nett result being that when insolation and temperature are high or low, saturation deficit is similarly high or low. The factor that militates against the use of these simpler correlations is that evaporation is never quite in phase with the individual meteorological parameters, except possibly with those based on air movement. It is interesting to recall here the further empitical correlations which have been found between evaporation and insolation and between evaporation and temperature by Prescott (1940, 1943). In essence, evaporation of any kind calls for a source of energy, in this case solar radiation, and there is no doubt that the. estimation of evaporation in the future will take into account this source of latent heat as well as the atmospheric factors of temperature, humidity and air move- ment. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The authors are indebted to Mrs. I. Mathison of the Waite Agricultural Research Institute for organizing the necessary computations, to Mr. B. Mason, South Australian State Climatologist of the Commonwealth Meteorological Branch, for determining wind patterns over Australia, and to Dr. C. H. B, Priestley and Mr. E. L. Deacon, of the Section of Meteorological Physics, C.S.LR.O., for advice concerning vertical wind structure. They also wish to thank the headquarters of the Commonwealth Meteorological Branch for prepar- ing sunshine maps of Australia, and in particular Mr. J. C. Foley of that Branch, for helpful advice on the handling of observed Australian evaporation data, REFERENCES Anperson, E. R. 1952 U.S. Geol. Surv. Circular 229, Lake Hefner Studies, Brack, J. N., Bonytuon, C. W,, and Prescott, J. A, 1954 Quart. Journ. Roy: Met. Soc., 80, 231-235 Bonytuon, C. W. 1950 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 73, 198-219 Brunt, D, 1944 Physical and Dynamical Meteorology, 2nd Ed., Cambridge Univ. Press. 137 CoMMONWEALTH MeTeoroLosicaL Brancu 1954 Maps of Annual, Six- monthly and Monthly Evaporation C.S.LR. 1933 Pamphlet 42 Fercuson, J, 1952 Aust. Jour. Sci. Res., 5a, 315-330 Forey, J. C. 1947 Report Aust. N.Z. Ass, Adv. Sci. (Perth), 302 (in title only, text privately circulated) Penman, H.L. 1948 Proc. Roy. Soc., A, 193, 120-145 Penman, H.L. 1950 Q. J. Roy. Met. Soc., 76, 372-383 Prescorr, J. A. 1938 four. Aust. Inst. Agr. Sci., 4, 33-0 Prescott, J. A. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 64, 114-118 Prescott, J. A. 1943 Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust., 67, 1-6 THornTHWaiTs, C. W. 1948 Geogr. Rev,, 38, 55-94 NOTES ON THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA NO. 6” BY ERNEST H. ISING Summary The paper describes one new genus and seven new species of South Australian plants. Five of them are in Chenopodiaceae, viz., Atriplex sessilifolia n.sp., Kochia concava n.sp., K. ovata n.sp., Malacocera biflora n. sp. and Bassia holtiana n. sp. Carinavalva glauca n. gen. et n.sp. in Cruciferae and Goodenia helenae n.sp. in Goodeniaceae are also included. Species recorded for the first time in South Australia are Lepidium strongylophyllum F. v. M. in Cruciferae and *Osteospermum calendulaceum L. f. in Compositae. The latter species is an introduction from South Africa, as is the showy yellow daisy, *Senecio pterophorus DC., which is spreading near Mount Lofty and could become a pest on cultivated land. All the new species were found in the Oodnadatta district, mostly on Evelyn Downs, the property of Mr. R. G. Holt. 110 NOTES ON THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA No. 6(1) (With descriptions of one new genus and seven new species) By Ernest H. Isine Communicated by C. M, Eardley *° 'y y*) [Read 12 August 1954] SUMMARY The paper describes one new geus and seven new species of South Australian. plants. Five of them are in Chenopodiaceae, vis., Alriplex sessilifolia nsp., Kochia concava n.sp., K, ovata n.sp., Malacocera biflora nm. sp. and Bassia holizana nu. sp. Carinavalva glauca n. gen, et np. m Criciferae and Goodenia helenae n.sp. in Goode- tiiaceae are also included, Species recorded for the first time in South Australia are Lepidtant strongylephyllum F. v. M. in Cruciferae and *Osteospermauii calendulacenm L. £, in Compositae. The Jatter species is an introduction from South Africa, as is the showy yellow daisy, *Senecio ptero- phorus DC, which is spreading near Mount Tofty and could become a pest on cultivated land. All the new species were found in the Oodnadatta district, mostly on Evelyn Downs, the property of Mr. R. G. Holl. Most of the species mentioned in this paper were collected by me on Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, a sheep station owned by Mr, R. G. Holt. Through the hospitality of Mr. and Mrs. R, G, Holt and the transport provided, I have been able to collect botanical specimens during the past five years. The abbreviations set out below have been used for the names of the herbaria mea toned, according to “Index Herbariornm,” Pt. I, 2nd Ed., by J. Lanjouw and F, A, Staflen. AD... Herbarium of the University of Adelaide, soon to be hotised in the new State Herbarium, Botanic Garden, Adelaide. Kk .. The Herbarium, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England. MEL... National Herbarium of Victoria, Melbourne. NSW ..., National Herbarium of New South Wales, Sydney, GRAMINEAE Digitaria coenicola Nees. Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, E. H. Tsing, No. 3628, 8.10.53. This is the first record for our Far North. Identification by Mr. L, D. Williams. PROTEACEAE Adenanthos terminalis R. Br, Wanilla, Eyre Peninsula, £. I. Ising, No. 3413, 2,9,38, First record for Eyre Peninsula. LORANTHACEAE Additional host plants can now be recorded for three species of Loranthus, all from Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadaita, E. H. Ising. Loranthus exocarpi Behr. On Acacia tetragonophylla EF. v. M., October 1950 and 317.51; on Pittosporum phillyracoides DC, 31.8.51 and 7.10.53; Eremophila dutionii F.v. M,, 20.7.51; on Cassia phyllodinea R. Br., 22,9.53. L. preissii Mig. On Acacia cambagei R, 'T. Baker, 26.7.51 and 9.8.51, L, maidenti Blakely. On Acacia cambagei R. T. Baker, 26.7.51. * University of Adelaide, @) Paper No, 5 in this series appeared in 1937, Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 61, 221. Wt CHENOPODIACEAE Atriplex sessilifolia n. sp. Suffrates usque ad 15 cm, alt., perennis, unjsexualis, ramis procumbentibus demutn erectis, subalbis, squamo-tomentosis; folia 4-7 x 3-5 mm, ovata, acuminata, integra, sessillia, glauco-yirentia, tomento syuamoso albido, in ramis distaliter conferta; flores axillares, fasciculati; bracteoli fructus circa + mm. long,, et 5 mum. Jat, tenui, resticulati, suborbiculati, basi cordati, margine integri, miucronibus venarum palmatarum exceptis, usque ad basin aperti; appendices nullae; pedicellus 1 mm, lony,; stylt 2, circa 2 mm. long,; sendin erecta, racicula laterali. Undershrub up to 15 cm. high, perennial, branches procumbent and finally erect, whitish with scaly tomentum; leaves 4-7 mm. long, 3-5 mm, wide, ovate, acuminate, entire, sessile, pale green with whitish scaly tomentum, densely placed specially in upper part of branches; flowers dioecious, in axillary clusters; frrit- ing bracteoles about 4 mm. Jong and 5 mm, wide, thin, reticulate, suborbicular, cordate at base, margins entire except for mucro terminating each of the palmate veins, open to base; appendages absent; pedicel 1 mm. long; styles 2 about halt as Jong as bracteole; sced vertical with lateral radicle. Male plant not seen, Mount Willoughby Station, about 80 niles south-west of Oodnadatta, E. 4, Jsing, No. 3570, 12.8.52, fig, 1, 14-16, the halotype. The Aolotype (AD). conststs of one complete plant and one piece (isotype NSW), Another complete plant (paratype) was collected at the same time and at the same place and this is also in the Adelaide University Herbarium, This is all that was collected, both of them female plants and both bear the No. 3570, aud all are covered by the description herewith, The new species is nearest to Atriplex cerdijolia J. M. Black but differs in being a woody perennial; leaves smaller, entire, pale greet with whitish scales, nat cordate; flowers dioecious; fruiting bracteole suborbicular with margmal teeth at extremity of palmate veins. Bassia holtiana n.sp- Suffratee usque ad 25 cm, alt., ramis diffusis, albo-tomentosis; folia plana, lineatia, 5-15 mm. long., villosa, dispersa; flores solitarii; pertanthus fructus durus,, albo-tomentosus, circa 3 mm, long, et diam., membro subnullo, facie anteriore subplana, verticaliter pluri-costata, facie posteriore breviter gibbosa; basis perianthi fortiter concava, oblonga, obliqua, magna; spinae 2, glabri, tuberculati, longiori 6-7 mm. divergenti, breviore 34 mm, Tatius divergenti (raro tertius brevis adest) ; senzina erecta. Small undersheub up to 25 cm. high, branches mostly diffuse, white-tomentose ; leaves flat, Jinear 5-15 mm, Jong, scattered, villous; ffowers solitary; frutling peridnth hard, white-tomentose, about 3 mm. Jong and broad, limb almost want- ing, anterior face almost flat with several vertical ribs. posterior face somewhat gihbous; base deeply hollowed, oblong, very oblique, large; spines 2, glabrous, mostly with a tubercle, rarely a third short spine, the longer one 6-7 mm., diver- gent, shorter one 3-4 mm. and more widely divergent; seed vertical, Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, found on this Station and named in honour of the owner, Mr. R, G. Holt. F. H. Ising, No. 3624, Angust 1953, fig. I, 17-19, the Aolotype (AD) consists of ten pieces off the type plant (iso- types} and all are covered by the description herewith. Besides the holotype, I collected, from the same locality and at the same time, different specimens of the new species and these are given different numbers (paratypes). K, NSW, and MEL isotypes. The new species differs from Bassia uniflora (R. Br.) FP. v. M. in base oblong and more oblique, Hat villous leaves and vertical seed. From B. paralellicuspts R. H. Anderson in divergent, longer, glabrous spines and shorter villous leaves. 12 Bassia blackiene EF, H, Ising, Specimens from Condiments Plain (near Mount Batty Station), 45 miles south of Oodnadatta, show that the leaves are up to 20 mm. long, sessile by a broad base: fruiting perianth to 4 mm. long, remaining fomentose; spines sometimes only slightly recurved; base oblique, A. #7, ising, No, 3583, 13.7.52. Kochia concava n. sp. Suffrulex, erectus, 30-40 cm. alt, cattle ramisque lignasis, adpresse alba- pubescentibus; folia 12-32 x 1°5-3 mim,, linearia vel lanceolata, acuta, crassa, sessilia, basi lata, adpresso-sericea, albo-pubescentia, utrmaue longitudinaliter costata vel rugosa; periontius fractus concavus, 4-10 mm, diam, ala inclusa, tomento denso albo-lanato intricatn abditus: w/a 2-4 mm. fat., annulata, corface:, adscendens; /eba 4-7, inaequalia, irregularia, obtusa; tubus convexus, 1-2 mm, long., circa 4 min. diam.; basis parva; semine horizontals, oblonga, plawa, brunnea, 2 mm. longa. Erect. shrub 30-40 em, high; stem and ltanches. woody, with white silky appressed pubescence; eaves 12-32 min. long, 1°5-3 mm. wide, linéar-lanceolate, acute, thick, sessile, attached by broad base, longitudinally ribbed or rugose oan hoth faces, pubescence white, silky appressed ; fruiting perianth concave, 5-10 mm. diam. including wing, hidden by dense white loose woolly hairs; wing 2-4 mm. wide, annular, coriaceous, ascending; dobes 4-7, very unequal and irregular, obtuse; fube 1-2 mm. long, about 4 mm, wide, convex; base small; sced horizontal, oblonz, 2 nim. long, flat, brown. Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, K. H. Tsing, No. 3561. 3.9,52 fig. T, 1-5, the holotype consisting of three pieces off the type plant and are covered by the description herewith (NSW isotype), Only one plant seen and collected from. JZolotype AD. This new species differs from Kochia seleroptera J, M, Black im hairs un branches pubescent: leaves longer and with prominent longitudinal ribs on both faces; fruiting perianth larger and with villous bairs; wing annular and very unequally labed and tube not ribbed. Although the new species js alrnost identical with Kochia ertantha BP. v. M. in stem, branches, leaves and in the hairs of the fruiting perianth, it differs radi- cally in shape and consistency of the fruiting perianth which is hard and thick; wing concave, ascending, very unequally lobed; in tube convex and seed horizontal. Kochia ovata n. sp. Suffrutex, circa 13 em. alt., ramis paucis plerumaiie procumbentibus; ramulis Jateralitas numerosis, 5-20 mm. long., circa 3 mm, diam., folia et tomento meliusis; lanta tota densissime albo-lanata et caulo foltisque abditis; folia plerumque 2 mm. long., sessilia, ovata, subconcava, obtusa, integra, conferta, allernata, sursnin villosa; perianthus fructus 2-3 mm. diam, ala horizontali inclusa, glaber sed loba villosa; ala tenuiter metnbranacea, dilute atirea, circa O-5 mm. lat, I-fissa vel irregularis; tubus homisphacricus, circa 1 im. long., dilute brunnenus, nitens; eostue una vel plures distinctae; basis parva, orbiculata, minute concava; semina horizontalis, 1 mm, diam., atro-brunnea, nitens, Small widershrub about 13 cm. high, branches few, mostly procumbent; numerous Jateral branchlets 5-20 mm, long and 3 mm. thick including leaves and wool; whole plant so densely white woolly tomentose as fo hide all stems and leaves; leaves usually 2 mm. long, sessile, ovate, somewhat concave, obtuse, entire, closely placed, alternate, villous hairs on upper face; fruiting perianth 2-3 mun. diam,, including horizontal wing, glabrous except Inbes which are villous; wing thin, membranons, pale-golden, once cleft, about O°5 mm. wide, sometimes uneven; tube hemispherical, about 1 tm. long, pale brown, shming; ribs one with often several others more or less distinct; base amall, circular, minutely hollowed; seed horizontal, 1 mm, diam., dark brown, shining. 113 Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, £. H. Ising, No. 3563, 10,10,52, fig. I, 10-13, the holotype. The teletype (AD.) consists of three pieces off the type plant which are covered hy the description herewith, Only one plant was collected from and each piece bears the same number, No, 3563 (NSW iso- type}. Many other specimens were collected from the type locality in 1954, Differs from Kochia enchylaenoides J. M, Black in leaves ovate and smaller; perianth hase smaller, 1-6 ribbed, mot turning black and clothing densely woolly. From K. tamariscina (Lindl.) J. M. Black in the clothing, leaves and perianth tube. Malacocera biflora n- sy). Suffrutex usque ad 25 cm. alt, ramis numerosis, lateralibus procumbentibus, totis albo-tomentosis; falia alternata, linearia vel oblonga, acuminata, sessilia, basi lata, villosa, im aetate subglabra, 3-9 x 1-5 mm, (in plantas juvenilibus usque ad 25 mm. longa); flores parvuli, bini axillares, in ramis distaliter conferti, dense tomentosi; perianthus obtuse paullum 5-lotatus, fructum tegens; stigmata 2; perianthus fructus planus, citea 5 mt. long., sursum 3-5 mm. diam.; aloe J, circa 1-5 mm, long., horizantales, obtusae vel acntae, stimbolles, 2 superioribus cornict- latas, ab inferiore late separatas (raro ala quarta lateralis adest); basis perianthi orbiculata, centralis, dense tadianto-villosa; fubus brevissinus, comvexus; semina horizontalis, biconvexa, Small undershrub up to 25 cm. high; branches numerous, lateral ones pro- cumbent, all hidden by white tomentum; leaves linear to oblong, acuminate, villous, more or less glabrous with age, 3-9 mm. long x 1-5 min, wide (up to 25 mm. long on young plants), sessile with broad base, alternate; flowers small, consistently 2 in axils, crowded at top of branches, densely tomentose; perianth with 5 small lobes which close over the fruit; stigmas 2; frititing perianth flat, about 5 mm. long and 3-5 mm. wide at summit; wings usually 3 about 1°5 mm. long, horizontal, obtuse or pointed, more or less soft, the two at the top horn-like in appearance and widely separated from the basal one, sometimes a fourth lateral one; base small, circular, central, surrounded by dense yillous radiating hairs; tbe very short, convex; seed horizontal, hiconvex, Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, E. H. Ismg, No. 3616, 27.10.53, fig. I, 6-9, the holotype, The Avlotype (AD) consists of twelve pieces off the type plant which are all covered by the description herewith. Besides the holotype, I also collected, from the same locality and at the same time, different specimens of the new species and these are given different numbers (paratypes). NSW and MEL isotypes.) Malacocera was described by R. H. Anderson in 1926, Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, li, 382 and inter alia he describes the flowers as solitary in the axils with three horizontal horns on the perianth, but he agrees (in a letter to me} that the new species should be placed in this genus although the flowers are consistently two in the axils and there is sometimes a fourth horizontal wing, The new species differs from Malacocera tricornis (Benth.) R. H, Atiderson in flowers always being two im the axils and the flat wings broader and shorter, also ina much larger perianth. M. tricornis and M. biflora n. sp. grow intermingled with one another on Evelyn Downs, CRUCIFERAE Lepidiuws pseudo-ruderale Thell. Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, E. HW. Ising, No. 3452, 5.8.52. Dirst record for Far North, L. strangylophiylium F. v, M, Undershrub up to 25 cn. high, at least biennial, glabrous; stem and branches striate, hard and woody, erect, stem at base to 3 num. diam. ; eaves obovate, up to 24 mm. long and 14 mm. wide, abruptly tapering into a short petiole of 3 mm,, entire, obtuse, thick, rigid, midrib prominent at il4 base and decurrent on stem; racemes terminal, dense, lengthening in fruit to 10 cm. and persisting on the plant for two or more seasons, a new branch spring- ing trom the base of old raceme; fruiting pedicels very spreading, 5-6 min. long, rigid, persistent; sepa/s with white margins, 4 mm. long, oblong, broad at base, keeled at summit; petals white, oblanceolate, 5 mm. long. narrowed to base; pod almost orbicular, 5 mm. long, 4 mm. wide, valves boat-shaped with narrow wing; style 1-2 mm. long; stigma capitate, small; notch shallow, slightly divergent; seed one in each cell, pendulous; sephuw narrow. — Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south- west of Qodnadatia, EB. HH. Ising, 10.10.51, No. 3562. First record for South Australia. Previously recorded from Central Atistralia and Queensland. Carinavalva noy, gen. Trom Latin carina, keel; velea valve; the valves of the pod are keeled. Sepala 4 oblonga, duabus exterioribus basi saceatis; petala tenuiter lanceolata, longe acuminata; sfanting 6 tetradynama; fructus brevis latusque, lateraliter com- pressus dehiscens; wvaleis cymbiformibus, mediis netvis conspicuis; septa tenni elliptico, muris cellularum plus mimusye quadratarum epidermidis undulatis; stignw 2-lobatunt; stylus brevissimus; ovariuam sessile bi-cellulare; owu/a numerosissima ; coiwledanes incumbentes, tenuiter oblongis, compressis, breviter stipitatis, — Herha annua; segmentes folti lineares ; flores racemosi, peduncults mudis, Sepuls 4 oblong, 2 outer ones saccate at base; petals narrow lanceolate with long point; stamens 6, 4 long and 2 short; ped short and broad, compressed laterally, dehiscent; valves boat-shaped, midnerve conspicuous; sepliuim narrow elliptical, af tight angles 1o greatest diameter of pod, with more or less square-shaped epi- dermal cells whose walls are wavy; stigma 2-lobed; style very short: ovary sessile, 2-celled; ovules very numerotis; colyledons incumbent, narrow oblong, flattened, shortly stipitate. — Annual herb; leaves with lineat segments; Sowers racemose, peduncles naked, Oo-S5 mm. a a SEE | Text Fig. 1 Epidermal cells of septum of Carinavulva glauca nov, spec. showing tndulate walls. Camera lucida drawing by Miss C. M. Eardley. This new genus differs from Cuphonotus O. E. Schulz in the plant glaucous; petals with a long claw and point; anthers larger, oblong; short style; pod tapering at base; mid-nerve conspicuous on valves of pod; seeds exuding an unbroken mucus when moistened and ovules very numerous. From Hywtendlobus Nuttall it differs in the plant glaucous; in different leaves, petals and anthers; mid- nerve on valves of pod not winged; very numerous ovules; the presence of a style and cotyledons. stipitate, From Phlegmatospermum O, E. Schulz in the plant glaucous ; Jeaves pinnatisect ; petals narrow lanceolate; pod bluntly notched; ovules very numerous; seeds yery small and cotyledons incumbent. From Stenopetalune R. Br, it differs in the plant glaucous: two outer sepals saccate at base; midnerve 183 conspicuous on valves of pod; stigma 2obed; ovules and seeds very numerous. It is very interesting te note that the new genus has the long slender petals of Stenopetalum. O. E. Schulz's monograph) on the Cruciferae separates the genera into tribes and subtribes and although Carinavalva nov. gen. comes near to the tribe Lepidieae it cannot be placed in it at present because the honeyglands have not been satisfactorily observed. Schulz uses this character in his descriptions. These floral nectaries, if present, are extremely small and in spite of much searching they were not clearly seen, but it is helieved that each of the two lateral stamens -has a pair of minute spur-like glands close together at its outer base. The new genus definitely does not agree with tribe Lepidieae in the epidermal cells of the septum, being more or less square-shaped with undulate walls in Carinavalva while in tribe Lepidieae the cells have almost straight walls. It appears that a new tribe is necessary to accommodate the new genus. The characters which are common to Carinavaiva and tribe Lepidieae are (a) statnens shorter than petals, not sunk in horizontal receptacle and erect, (b) sepals erect, (c) fruit without gynophore, laterally compressed, septum narrow and (d) cotyledons narrow, not folded. Carinavalva fits into the key in the Flora of South Australia, J. M- Black, 1948, Fart II, second edition, 370-1, as follows :— Silic ulosae— H. Pod broad, compressed. I. Valves folded and keeled, at right angles to the narrow septum, pod laterally compressed, L. Cells 2-many seeded. M. Cotyledons incumbent. N. Seeds mucose. NN. Ovules about 140 in ovary, style short, pod obovate, glabrous = Zip ain _.. CARIN AVALVA NN. Ovules up to 20 in ovary, style absent. Pod ovate or oblong, rounded on, back and stimmit, ovules 6-12 in ovaty rere . CUPHONOTUS Pod ovoid, rounded at stmmit, ovules 12-20 in ovary, valves winged ke is ,. HyMerd.osus M, Cotyledons accumbent of oblique, ovules. 6-12 in ovary, style short, pod ovate, pubescent .. PHLEGMATOSPER MUM Carinavalva glauca n. sp. Planfa annua, usque ad 30 cm. alt,, glabra, glauca, erecta, lateralilter Tamosa ; folia usque ad 6 cm, longa, pinnatisecta, segmentibus lateralibus 3-6, linearibus, usqite ad 20 mm, longis, terminali usque ad 40 mm. longi, obtuso; racemus florum @) In Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzentan, 2936, 2te Aufl, Bd. 176, pp. 227-658. A Fig, I, 1-19 Kochia concova o.sp. No. 3561, Irniting perianths with hairs. removed: 1, side view; 2-4, top view; 5, vertical section. Malacocera biflora n.sp. No, 3616, fruiting perianths with hairs removed: 6 and 8, top view; 7, view from below; 9, yertical section. Kochia pvata n.sp. No, 3563; 10, side view of fruiting periadth; 11, vertical section of fruiting perianth; 12, top view of feat with hairs removed; 13, side view of leaf with hairs removed. Atriplex sessilifolia ¥. sp. No. 3570: 14, fruiting bracteole showing outer side; 15, inside of fruiting bracteole showing lateral tadicle; 16, lea£. _ Bassia holtiane n. sp. No. 3624, fruiting perianths with hairs. retnoved - 17, anterior face; 18, posterior face; 19, vertical section. 1i7 terminalis, usqtie ad 12 cm. longus; pedunculum circa & cm, long., erectum; sepala 45 mm. longa, viridula, albo-marginata, obtusa; petala usque ad 15 mm. longa, cremea; stamina 4 longa et 2 brevia; stylus circa 1 miu. longus; fructus obovatus, usque ad 11 mm. longus ct 6 mm, latus, apice obtusus vel subincisus, in valvis 2 cymbiformis lateraliter compressus, reticulatus; pedicellus frucfus circa 5 mm. longus, erectus; stigma 2-lobatum; sepium transversum; ovula 2-seriata, circa 70 in valve tino} senna brunnea, oblonga, muco exudentiz.. Annual up to 30 em. high, glabrous, glaucous, erect, with several lateral branches; Jeaves to 6 em, long, pinnatisect with 3-6 linear segments about 20 mm. long, terminal one up to 4 cm, long, obtuse; flowers in a raceme up to 12 em. long, terminal, peduncle about & cm. long, erect; sepals 4-5 mm. tong, pale green with white margin, ohtuse; petals up to 15 mm, long, cream); stamens 4 long and 2 short; style about 1 mm. long; pod obovate, up to 11 mm. Jong, 6 mm, wide, obtuse or slightly notched at summit, compressed laterally into 2 boat-shaped valves, reticulate: fruiting pedicel about 5 mm. long, erect; stigma visually 2ohed ; sepium at right angle to valves; ovules in 2 rows, about 70 to each valve; seeds mid-brown, oblong, exuding mucus. In some flowers the adjacent median filaments were joined in pairs from the hase almost to the anthers. Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, E. H. Ising, No. 3569, 10.9.52, the holotype, fig. IL, 1-7. The holotype consists of four complete plants (AD.), which were all collected by me in the same Jocality and at the same time and are covered by the description herewith (NSW isotype). The following specimens of this new species were also collected—6 complete plants, No, 3642, at Evelyn Downs on 2.8.52 (MEL, K, paratypes); 15 complete plants, No. 3643, at Mount Barry Station, 60 miles south of Oodnadatta, owned by Mr, R. D. Kempe, on 26,8.51, these are paratypes and are located in the same place as the holotype. LEGUMINOSAE Avacta argyrophylla Hook, Kanmantoo, E. H. Ising, No, 3407, 15.5.38. A solitary shrub of about 2 m. in height with the typical golden shoots to the branchlets: in bud and young fruit. The most southerly place yet recorded for this species. FRANKENJACEAE Frankenia foliosa J. M- Black. Mount Willoughby Station, 80 miles south- west of Oodnadatta, FE, H. Ising. No, 3576, 1.8.51, The identification was made at the Royal Botenic Gardens; Kew, England, and is an additional locality for the Far North. GooDENIACEAE Goodenia helenae n.sp- Frutex erectus, perennis, 30-40 cm. alt., deorsum lignosus ; caulus 10 mm. diam.; rami numerosi, costati, subviscost, 1 ubescentt; folia basalia non visa, illas cauli Jate ovata vel orbiculata, obtusa, pubescentia, margine basi excepta crasse triangulatu-dentata, usque ad 50 mm. longa petiolo incl., superiora breviora, nervis totis bilateraliter prominentibus, deorsum nervo medio in petiolo et caula decurrenti, aliis in petiolo decurrentibus, basi conjunctibas et in caulo costas Bi $$ Fig. II, 1-10 ; Carinavalva glauca n. gen, et H.sp. No. 3569: 1, leaf; 2, fruit; 3, septum, showing funicles in ome valve; 4, petal; 5, transverse section of fruit showing seeds; 6. embryo, cot, — incumbent cotyledons, tad.=radicle; 7, transverse section of seed, tad. = radicle, cot. = cotyledons. Goodenia helenae n, sp. Nos, 3626 and 3626A = §, lower surface of leaf, showing attuch- rete at node; 9, corolla Taid open; 10, showing two rows: of curved teeth or ribs decurrent rom isinus. 119 lateralia 2 decurrentia efformantilus; petiolwn usque ad 25 mm, longum; peduncn- tex 1-3 floreseens, 245 mm. longum, summo bracta lincatia 2, 2-4 mtn, longa ornatum ; pedicellum usque ad 8 mm. longum; bracteola 2, linearia, 2 mm. long., Horis 2-3-cymosis bracteolis distantibus; sepala lanceolata, pubescentia, 5-6 mm, longa; coralla flava, 20-25 mm. longa, haud saccata, extrinsecus pubescens, in tubo villosa et sub sino 2-costata, costis deorsum uni-seriato-dentatis, dentibus acutis desuper curvatis, extus in floris maturis costi prominenti; alae apice obtusae, auciculis mulliss oathera apiculata; situs 10-12 mm. longus deorsum villosus, apice post indusiuwm ciliatum expansus pilosusque: capsi/a usque ad 12 mn. longa, olovoidea, septo circa 5 trm. longo; seming 15-20, oblonga, circa 4:5 mun. longa et 3 mm, lata, coneava, pallida, punctulata, tenuiter marginata. Shrub erect, stout, perennial, 30-40 cm. high, with woody base: smatn stem about 10 mm. thick, lateral branches numerous, ribbed, somewhee viscid, pubescent ; radical leaves not seen, stem leaves broad-ovate to orbicular, obtuse, pubescent, coursely triangular toothed except at base, up to 5 cm. long including petiole, becoming smaller upwards, nerves prominent on both faces including marginal one, on lower surface midrib decurrent on petiole and stem, lateral and niarginal nerves decurrent on petiole and joining at its base to form a decurrent nil) on stem, one on either side of midrib; pettole up to 25 mm. long; peduncles 1-3- flowered, 2-6 mm. long with 2 linear bracts 2-4 inm. long at summit. pedicels to 8 mm. long with 2 hnear bracteoles 2 mm. long distant from the flower when there are 2-3 flowers ina cyme; sepals 3-6 mm. long, lanceolate, pubescent ; corolla yellow, 20-25 mm, long, not pouched, pubescent outside, villous in tube and 2 ribs decurrent from sinus with a row of acute downward curved short tecth an each int lower half, ribs prominent on outside of mature flowers, wings broad at sum- nuit, auricles absent; anthers apiculate; style 10-12 mm, long, villous in lower half, a tuft of hairs at its expanded summit at back of indtusium which is ciliate at summit; capsule to 12 mm. long, obovoid, dissepiment about 5 mm, long; seeds 15-20, oblong, about 4-5 mm. long and 3 mm, wide, concave, pale, punectulate, rim narrow. Eyclyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, EZ. I. Ising, No. 3626, 15,9,50, fg. IL, 8-10, the holotype: No. d626A, 15.10.50 the paratype. Holatupe and paratype (AD.). The holotype consists of 9 pieces off the type plant (NSW, MEL, K, isotypes), and the paratype consists of 13 pieces off the type plant (MEL, I), and both are covered hy the description herewith. Both the holotype and the paratype were collected in the same locality but on different dates, the latter was chiefly used for the description of the ripe fruits. The new species ts named in honour of my daughter (Mrs. R. G. Hole of Evelyn Downs). Tt was only found growing in loose stones and rock at the base of an 3-foot cap of almost solid rock persisting on the flat-topped ranges about 100 feet ahove the strrommding plain, dt differs from Goodenia rotundifolia R. Br. in heing a stout erect wonidy shrab, well branched; petioles not tapering; peduncles stout, much shorter than stem leaves, hracteoles distant fram flowers; larger flowers, no auricles style longer, villous in lower half, indusium hair-tufted at back; capsule Tonger. From G. grandifiera Sims in being a stout woody perennial; simple leaves and petioles; corolla without protuberance, villous in tube; style glabrous in upper patt; capsule obovaid, seeds concave, punctulate. From G. decurrens R. Br. in stems leafy all aver; in the clothing; leaves smaller; indastum with tuft of hairs at back; capsule laryer, seeds concave, inargin thin, ComposiTaz Catotis brevirndiata (E. H. Ising) G. L. Davis. This plant was described by me (1922, Trans, Rey, Soc. South Australia, 46, 608) as a variety of C. wwlticaulis (Turez.) Domin and has now been raised to specific rank by Dr, G. L. Davis, 120 1952, Revision of the genus Calotis R. Br., Proc. Linn. Soc. New Suuth Wales, 77, (3-4), 186, It is a rare species, only recorded in this State on the Nullarbor Plain at Watson and Hughes and at Eucla im West Australia. *Osteospermum calendulaceum L.f. (Oligocarpus calendulaceus Less.) ; tribe Calenduleae, Annual, stems many from the crown, at first ascending, then diffuse, procumbent or trailing, much branched and widely spreading, pubescent and glandular, as well as the leaves; young parts cobwebby. Leaves alternate, 1-2 inches long, 4-10 mm. wide, tapering at base or subpetiolate, oblong or lanceolate, irregularly few-toothed, repand or subentire, the upper small, sessile, linear, Pedicels terminal and axillary, one-headed. Heads small, few flowered, Involucral sciles lanceolate, acute, variably membranous-edged. Achenes of many forms, on the same plant or in the same head; 1. very much pitted and ridged across, obconical, crowned with an inflated hollow cup-like beak; 2. slightly wrinkled with a similar heak; 3, very much cross-ridged and beakless or nearly so; 4, scab- rous, but scarecly wrinkled, with an obsolete beak; 5, scabrous or smooth, terete or 3-cornered, with a long, horn-like, solid beak; 6. 3-cornered, the angles minutely winged; 7. cross-ridged and furrowed, with three membranous wings, exactly as in Tripterts, Hab—Cape Colony, South Africa. (Taken from the description bv Harvey, 1864-5, Flora Capensis, 3, 433.) Port Augusta, E. H. Ising, No, 3585, 22.10.52, This is the first record of this plant for South Australia. Identified by the Chief, Div, of Botany, Dept, of Agriculture, Pretoria, Union of South Africa, who. reports:—‘Tycho Norlindh working on the Calenduleae has sunk the genera Tripteris and Oligocarpus in Osteospermim, and we have arranged our herharium accordingly. Studies in the Calenduleae I, Monograph of the genera Dimorphotheca, Castalis, Osleospermum, Gibboria and Chrysanthemoides, By Tycho Norlindh, 1943." , clandestinum (Less) Norlindh, 1943, loc. cit., 328 (Tripteris clandestine Less.). This change of nate is necessary us Norlindh has sunk 7vipteris in Osteo- spermaon. Recorded already from fields near Brighton and Marino. Senecio pteraphorus DC. Crafers and Stirling (Mount Lofty Range), 2. Fi, Fsing, No. 3623, January to March, 1954. Identified by the Chief: Div. of Botany, Department of Agriculture, Pretoria, Union of South Africa, This introduction is spreading in the above district and could become a pest. It seeds prolifically, germinates readily and quickly occupies cultivated land. It is a perennial growing up to 3m, in height and has already been recorded in this State. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS T wish to acknowledge with thanks yery helpful criticism and surgestions, as to some of the species, from Mr. R. H. Andetson, B.Sc, (Agr.), Chief Botanist and Curator, Botanic Gardens, Sydney; Mr. A. W. Jessep, Director and Goyern- ment Botanist, Melbourne Botanic Gardens and National Herbarium; Dr. J. G. Woaud, Professor of Botany, for permission to use the herbaritt «under bis control aul Miss C. M. Eardley for much technical assistance and conumunicating the paper, both of Botany Department, University of Adelnide; Dr. C. G, Hansford, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond, for composing the Latin descriptions; and Miss L. Sherwood, Botany Department, University of Adelaide, for executing the drawings. THE "GRAND" UNCONFORMITY BETWEEN THE ARCHAEAN (WILLYAMA COMPLEX) AND PROTEROZOIC (TORROWANGEE SERIES) NORTH OF BROKEN HILL, NEW SOUTH WALES BY R. B. LESLIEAND A, J. R. WHITE* Summary A structural and petrological study has been made of a small portion of the unconformity between the older Precambrian (Willyama complex) and the later Precambrian (Torrowangee Series). A true angular unconformity has been recognized but post-Torrowangee folding and shearing has in places complicated this primary feature. The Willyama rocks are a complex of metasediments, cataclastic schists and pegmatites, which has been intruded by a leucocratic muscovite granite-the Mundi Mundi granite. The sediments of the Torrowangee Series are of glacial origin. The basal beds of this glacigene series are notable in that they contain for the most part material derived from the immediately underlying rock. This has given rise to some peculiar rock types such as granite tillites and slate tillites. Petrological studies made on the Torrowangee sediments and the boulders contained in them, as well as on the rocks of the Willyama complex give indisputable evidence of the pre-Torrowangee age of the Mundi Mundi granite. The Torrowangee sediments have in places been highly folded with some local dynamic metamorphism but in the area studied at least, there is no evidence of post-Torrowangee igneous activity. 121 THE “GRAND” UNCONFORMITY BETWEEN THE ARCHAEAN (WILLYAMA COMPLEX) AND PROTEROZOIC (TORROWANGEE SERIES) NORTH OF BROKEN HILL, NEW SOUTH WALES By R. B. Lesztre and A, J, R. Wirrre * SUMMARY A structural and petrological study has been made of a small portion of the unconformity between the older Precambrian (Willyama complex) and the later Pre- cammbrian (Torrowangee Series), A true angular unconformity has been recognised but post-Torrowangee folding and shearing has in places complicated this primary feature. The Willyama rocks are a complex of metasediments, cataclastic schists and pegmatites which has been intruded by a leucocratic muscovite granite—the Mundi Mundi granite. The sediments of the Torrowangee Series are of glacial origin, The basal beds of this glacigene series are notable in that they contain for the most part material derived from the immediately underlying rock. This has given rise to some peculiar rock types such as granite tillites and slate tillites, Petrological studies made on the Torrowangee sediments and the boulders con- tained in them, as well as on the rocks of the Willyama complex give indisputable evidence of the pre-Torrowangee age of the Mundi Mundi granite. The Torrowangeée sediments have in places been highly folded with some local dynamic metamorphism but in the area studied at least, there is no evidence of post-Torrowangee igneous activity. INTRODUCTION (a) Location The area is situated 26 miles due north of Broken Hill in the Barrier Ranges of New South Wales (fig. 1). It comprises some 15 square miles cover- ing the unconformity between the Torrowangee Series and the older rocks of the Willyama complex. LOCALITY PLAN SCALE aE EP Fig. t Locality plan showing prin- Sem cipal landmarks in the area. 7 sirannacce pf Xt A geological map of the wine {> hatched arca is included in this paper. oe Meche, \ puriamaars use | / rh f. oe ™ ‘ \ AMT FRAMES ( N * Department of Geology, University of Adelaide. ee 122 (ty) PurysrocraPay The area is one of low hills usually sparsely covered by a typically semi- arid vegetation consisting predominantly of mulga (/fcacta aneura), dead finish (Acacia tetragonophylla) and beefwood (Grevilea striatd), together with the ever-present saltbush. The hills of the area fall naturally into three well-defined groups. Jagged, craggy ridges im the schist area stand up in marked contrast to the rounded boulder-strewn hills of tillilte and the pale tor-covered hills of granite, fiecause of the paucity of vegetation and a general lack of soi cover the rock outcrops are usually particularly good. The country is well dissected by uumerous streams, the largest of these being the Brewery and the Wookookaroo Creeks. These streams, like others in the Barrier Ranges, are not permanent but flow only alter heavy rains. Low- ever, deposits of water-bearing sands along their sccmingly dry beds support large red gutns which give welcome relief from the scant vegetation of the hills. (c) Peavious InvesticaTions AND Scorg or Presnnt Work The first major contribution to the regional geology of the Barrier Ranges was published by Mawson in 1912, He recognised the unconformity between the Willyama complex and the Torrowangee Series and correlated the latter with the Adelaide System of South Australia, Mawson published an analysis of a younger pre-Torrewangee granite (vide pp. 126), which he called a “protogine granite.” The Geological Survey of New South Wales, Andrews and his asso- ciates, published a monumental work om the geology of the Broken Fill district in 1922, and although this work contributed much to the regional geology it was particularly concerned with the lode and its immediate environment. Andrews used the time terms Archacan and Proterozoic for the Willyama complex and Torrowangee Series, respectively, He also termed the “Newer” or “Protogine” granite of Mawson, the Mundi Mundi granite. These terms are retained in this paper. tn 1953 King and Thomson published an account of the regional geology of the Broken Hill district. Their map, the culmination of many years of field mapping by geologists of the Zine Corporation, far exceeds the preyiouts sketch maps in acctiracy and detail. An otttcome of this recent work was the proposed post-“Vorrowangee age of the Mundi Mundi granite. They also suggested that some of the pegmatites of the region post-dated the Torrowangee Serics. The present investigation is an attempt tu elncicate the complexities of the unconformity and to fix the relative age of the pegmatite and the Mundi Mundi gramte, STRATIGRAPHY The basal rocks of Archaean age are part of the Willyania complex. ‘They are overlain unconformahty hy a series of late-Proterozoic sediments, |he Torro- wangee Series, which has been correlated with the Sturtian Series of the Adelaide System. There is uo evidence of marine sedimentary deposition since Pre- cambrian time. The Willyama rocks were folded, metamorphosed, intruded and eroded before the Torrowangee sediments were deposited upon them with marked uncon- furmity. In places the unconformable contact is masked hy shearing, but clse- where it is well shown. Exposures in the vicinity of Brewery Well show a marked angular unconformity, the strikes of the older and newer beds bemg almost at right angles. Where the unconformity trace swings southward on the eastern side of the area, metamorphic convergence due to shearing has in places caused the exact demarcation of the unconformity to become difficult. 123 THE WILLYAMA ROCKS The term Willyatia complex was filst applied by Mawson (1912) to the extensive tract of ancient rocks. outcropping in the Barrier Ranges af New South Wales and the adjatent areas in South Australia. These rocks, which were originally a series of argillaceotis, arenaceotis and calcareous sediments, now appear as a complex of schists and gneisses due to intense pte-Torrowangee metamorphism, The highest grade of metamorphism occurs in the vicinity of Broken Hill itself, as evidenced by the abundant development of sillimanite in this region, The grade of metamorphism, however, dccreas¢s to the north, so that in the area tuder investigation the rocks are of low grade, normally not exceeding the green- echist facies. (a) Tue Frne-crarsep METASEDIMENTS The metasediments are dominantly very fine-grained arenaceous and argillace- ous schists, sometiines finely laminated, together with graphite “chiastolite” phyllites and thin-bedded chert-like rocks. The chert-like rocks are extremely fine-grained (average '04 mm.), Although they have a superficial resemblance to chert it is probable that they had a clastic origin and are therefore better described as meta-siltstones, Their colour yaries from) pure white to buff and almost black and many are flecked and banded. They consist essentially of a recrystallized aggregate of quartz with subordinate plagioclase (Ab 90). Flakes of green biotite and mitiscovite vary in amount, while tourmaline, zircon and iron ores ate accessory. A feature of many is the abundance of small black graphite inclusions in almost all of the minerals. Near the granite, the graphite although Jess abundant, occurs as segregations up to 1 mm, across, suggesting that the metasiltstones have been somewhat modified by the granite intrusion. The other fine-grained metasediments of this area differ from these chert- like rocks in the increased amount of argillaceous niaterial originally present in the sediments; this is now represented by sericitic micas. The relative amount of sericite and quartz varies up to the stage where sericite becomes the main constitiient of the rock, Tourmaline has a wide distribution throughout all the metasediments. Usually it occurs as an accessory but at times it becomes an important con- stituent. From the unconformity, at a point about 1 mile E.S,E, of the Brewery Well stockyards, thence continuing to the south, there occurs a distinctive formation up to 1,000 feet thick of dark, bluish-grey phyllites and fine-grained arenaceous schists which contains abundant but completely altered metacrysts of chiastolite (9625). The metacrysts are sqtiate-shaped in cross section and often display the zoning so typical of chiastolite, They are normally 4 inch across, but some, especially those in the more arenaceous beds, are up to 1 inch across and 5 to 6 inches in length. When examined under the microscope the chiastolites are seen to be entirely replaced by an aggregate of fine sericite, Both the dark colour of the matrix and the zoning of the metacrysts fs the result of abundant finely-disseminated graphite. This rock ts very similar to the chiastolite phyllite described by Browne {1922) from Mount Franks, some 15 miles further south. Im the case of the rock from Mount Franks, however, some andalusite was recognised in the thin section, > The specimen numbers referred to in the text are those of the Rock Catalogue, Department of Geology, University of Adelaide. 124 What appears. to be the same stratigraphical horizon somewhat modified occurs in contact with the Brewery Creek pluton {an inirnsion of the Mundi Mundi granite) on its southern and western sides. Here the rock (9668) is dark- grey in colour and the "“chiastolites” are only about 4 to 1 mm. across and 1 cm. im length, Ul-defined spots several millimetres across consisting of aggre- gates of biotite and muscovite are also present. The rock consists of pseudo- morphs after chiastolite, irregular segregutions of biotite and large pocciloblastic muscovite crystals ib a fine-grained matrix uf quartz, sericite, biotite and abundant graphite. Iron ore (haematite) and tourmaline ave also present, The chiastolite pseudomorphs, appear as square-shaped aggregates consisting either of quartz poeciloblastically including fine sericite or of small muscovite flakes. Usually the boundaries of the pseudomorphs are sharp, particularly when yuartz is the secondary mineral. At times the cross sections are seen to be divided into four segments by the diagonals of the squate and each of these segments seems to be separately replaced, giving the appearance of a twinned crystal (pl. LX, fig. 1 and 2), Quartz, apart from the Jarge crystals replacing the chiastolites, eecurs abundantly in the matrix as tiny xenoblastic crystals averaging “02 mm. in size. This recrystallized quartz is erowded with graphitic inclusions. Muscovite is also present as fitie-prained aggregates and as larger poeciloblastic flakes averaging *25 inm. in length. Biotite is not as abundant as muscovite. It vrcurs mnainly in segregations about 2 mn. across showing decussate structure. It is also present together with muscovite and quartz in the chiastolite pseudomorphs, but im this case the pseudomorphs are irregular and not clearly defined. The Inotite 1s a greemsh-hrown variety, X = pale brown, Y = Z-— dark brownish- green. Hematite and graphite are abundant as small black opaque grains, while tourmaline is accessory. The “chiastolite* phyllites occurring near the southern margin of the Brewery Creek pluton may have beet: formed by the thermal metamorphism of the granite itself and then replaced, in the manner described above, by late stage metasomatic activity, However, field evidence suggests that the chiastolites were formed on a regional scale prior to the intrusion and then later locally modified by the intrusion; the “chiastolites’ occtir in well-defined sedimentary bands and are flevelnped an a regional scale in places often remote from. granite, (b) Tare DyNamicatty Metamorpnosrp Writyama Rocks The coarse-grained quartz-mica schists and micaceous quartzites which out- crop in the eastern portion of the urea contrast sharply with the finer-grained schists to the west, both petrugraphically and in their manner of outcrop; the roarse-grainnd schists oulcrop as jagged razor-back crags which aften contain open holes commonly a foot of more actoss. All of the schists have a marked cataclastic texture ated consist of quartz muscovite and chlorite. In some of the finer-grained varieties the structure seen in this section is almust mylonitic. Streaks and bands of sericitic material alternate with bands consisting dominantly of quartz. About one mile west of the Taps soine of the schista examined contain an abundance of biotite and occasionally pink garnet. (cj) Pasre Rocks Ag amphibolitic rock has been mapped within the great pegmatite mass near Pollard's Well, This has not been examined in great detail, but ihe field and lahoratory work suggest a metasedimentary origin, (du) Tre Prematrres Other authors refer to the great development of these rocks in the Willyama complex of the Barrier Ranges. Mawson (1912) says: “In no other part of the world can pegmatite formations occur on a more extensive scale,” 125 To the south of Pollard’s Well occurs a mass of pegmatite more than halt 2a mile wide.This niass is intimately mixed with country rock, particularly at the margins, and is tlaversed by cross-cutting dykes of the pranite From which it is easily distinguished both in the field and in the laboratory. From these cross- cutting relationships it is inferred that the pegunatite pre-dates the granile, end, although some pegmatite may have been associated with the granite, there is no evidence to support this. Apart from this large mass several smaller masses aceur, while dykes are very abundant. Where the dynamic metamorphism his been more intense the dykes are usually parallel to the schistosity, whereas eisewhere the dykes tend ta follaw the bedding. At times the pegmatites show evidence of shearing at their peripheries, and In at least one case a pegmatite has been completely sheared out. Although dykes of pegmatite quite commonly extend to the uncontormily, they are never found in the adjacent Torrowangee rocks, suggesting that in this area, at least, all pegmatites are pre-Torrowangee in age. The pegmatite is usually very coarse-grained with felspars up to 3 inches across. The average cumposition of the peymuatites is about 60% felspar (both albite dnd microcline) and 40% quartz. Accessory minerals include musenvite, garnet and tourmaline, Magnetite occurs rarely, Reddish-brown garnet which ts widely distributed occasionally becomes an important constituent, sometimes making up about 10% of the rock. Usually it occurs as rhombic dodecahedrons, occasionally as icositetrahedrons, and is up to half an inch across. An approximate analysis of some of this garnet gave 10% MnO. I the field all stages from felspar-rich pegmatites to quartz reefs are seen, although the intermediate stage is usually more of the nature of a composite “Intrusion” of quartz within pegmatite, Tourmaline occurs. sporadically tn most of the pegmatite, but seems to be concentrated in some of the yuartz reefs, The general abundance of peymatites, together with the great stze and shape of the Pollard's Well mass, suggest that the pegmatite has a replacement origin. This hypothesis is supported by the fact that the foliation of the patches of relic schist within this mass is parallel to the foliation of the schists occurring else- where in the area, te) Tae Granite Post-dating the schists and pegmatites of the Willyama complex is an intrusive leueocralic granite, he Mundi Mundi granite (Andrews and Browne, 1922). Apart from the main mass of granite which has been termed the Brewery Creek pluton, other smaller masses outcrop along the upper reaches of the Wookookaroo Creek. These masses are more of less continuous and kave been considered by King and Thomson (1953) to be an extension of the “dyke” which extends from Yanco Glen to north of the Paps along the general trend of the unconformity. The northern extremity of this “dyke” has been stiudied, and no evidence can be Found in this locality at least ta stiggest a dyke-like origin. Rather, it seems to be part of the irregular roof of a larger granite mass below. This is supported by the fact that the intrusive contact between the granite and the steep- dipping schist is scen in places to he almost horizontal. The trace of the granite- schist contact often follows the contours around the valleys running into the main creek, therehy suggesting that it is flat, The present elongated outcrop appears to be due to the ercck cutting through this flat contact and exposing the granite. Numerous smaller masses and dykes of the same granite are widely dis- tributed throughout the castern part of the area. These dykes, which are usually very thin, commonly follaw the schistosity. One such dyke only two feet wide 126 was followed along the foliation for about three-quarters of a mile. The abundance of these smaller occurrences is also suggestive of the proximity of a larger granite mass below. The typical granites are leucocratic rocks in which the percentage of miafic minerals rarely exceeds 4%. They are characterised by a high percentage of muscovite and by a slight excess of plagioclase over microcline. The plagioclase always. has a composition approaching pure albite. According to the Shand classi- fication, these are per-aluminous sodi-potassic granites, while they compare closely with the alaskites of Johannsen (1932) (wide Table I, Column V). ‘Towards the centre of the Brewery Creek pluton the granite is medium to coarse in grain size, but elsewhere it is comparatively fine-grained. The granite is stressed to ihe extent of producing undulose extinction in the quartz, with some granulation at the edges of grains, but nowhere is any visible gneissic structure developed. The coarse-grained granite (9672) [rom the Brewery Creck mass is pale pinkish-grey, The approximate mineral composition is quartz 30%, plagioclase (Ab 95) 30%, microcline 25%, muscovite 10%, and biotite 5%, with tourmaline, apatite, and zircon accessory. Both felspars are cloudy, the plagioclase usually more so than the microcline. An interesting feature which is seen in all thin sections of the Mundi Mundi granite from the area, is the abundant development of small laths of colourless mica within the plagioclase crystals. These inclusions ate also occasionally seen in the microcline, The quartz oflen contains strings of fine inelusions and nuimerous hair-like rods, A chemical analysis of this rock is given in Table 1, Column I. Tasie L i re tb Vv SiO, me 7407 7340874507260, 75-08 ALOs ae MATZ 14-78 13-72-5499 13-48 FeO. nu OSL 0-67 6D O34 RA FeO oe OG 7909078083 MgQ O16 2B 4-20 CaO eS ES SZ SBM Na.O 3894-35 3-45 4330 4-20 KO 4-43 4:17 5-13. 45365403 H.0- O15 0:24 = O18 0-05 10+ 0-70 0-77 0-26 =a g 94 TiO... 0-19 0-2 = O17 O13 08 POs 0-10 0-11 0-27, O14 008 MnO O01 0-01 0-03 0-03 0-08 BaO — 0-02 0-05 = = ZrO: 0-03 0-01 -— a= = s me | “ES — -- = — Others vise — = 0-11 — 0°03 100-01 100-07 100-35 100-45 100-20 I. Mundi Mundi Granite from Brewery Creck pluton, S. of Poolamiacca, Barrier Ranges, N.S.W. Analyst: R. B. Leslie II. Mundi Mundi Granite fram Wookookaroo Creek, S_ of Poolamacea, Barrier Ranges, N.S.W. Analyst: A, J. R. White TTT. Mundi Mundi Granite, NW. of Paps, Battier Ranges, N.S.W, Analyst: J. C. H. Mingaye TV. Soda-Potash Granite, E. end Binherrie Hill, $.A. (Boolcoomata granite), Analyst: W, 5. Chapman V. Average of three typical alaskites — Johannsen, 1932. 127 A specimen typical of the fine-grained granite in the smaller outcrops (9671) was collected from the Wookookaroo Creck about two miles east of Brewery Well, and was chemically analysed for comparison with the coarse-grained gramite frown the pluton. This granite is comparable with the coarse-grained granite in every detail except the grain size, Apart from the mineralogical similarity, the chemical similarity is at once apparent in a comparison of the norms quoted below. Norm of Brewery Creek Granite Norm of Granite from Wookookaroo Creel Quartz 2. .. ... 3288 Quartz ea SSD Orthaclase os -.. 26-22 Orthoclase {is woe 24°56 Albite Shaw ites ee § 83+358 Atbite ett byes wee §=SG*B2 Anorthite bee = 67 Anorthite vous we, 2°05 Corundium cau wea «6-286 Corundum 7 | Beds Hypersthene —..., wy = «O73 Hypersthene a .- 323 Magnetite ee ED Magnetite es an 0-92 Timenite ... se 7 0-30 Imenite ... {res we = =030 Apatite itt ewe = O23 Apatite =... “om .- = =(024 Pyrite “oo <= .. O09 Pyrite _ ven witty — Zircon _ a . Odd Zirean tee av we = (O02 Water wa Wr outt *B5 Water... es “4 1-41 From this study it is evident that the two granites are comagmatic. The analyses also show close similarities with a phase of the Boolcoomata granite of South Australia whick is probably part of the same Precambrian petrographic province (Table I, Column 1V). Although the granite is normally fairly w1iform in composition, certain local yariations occur, This is usually reflected in the colour of the rock, which varies from pale grey to pinkish-grey and dark grey. These variations are due to the varying proportions of microcline and albite, the presence or absence of tourma- line, and the relative amounts of biotite and muscovite. Apart from a zone of felspathization twe inches or so wide at the immediate contact and the replacement of the chiastolite in the “chiastolite phyllite” (wide p. 124), there is very little evidence of contact metamorphism. However, several aplite dykes were observed both in the granite and the adjacent country rock on the south side of the Brewery Creek pluton, The maximum extent of thermal metamorphism is seen in the roof pendants and xenoliths of fine-grained biotite muscovite hornfels which are abundant at the tiorthern end of the Brewery Creek pluton. All the xenoliths have a definite lithological resemblance ta the fine-grained Willyama rocks immediately ta the south of the pluton. The difference is chiefly in the microfabric; the micas im the xenoliths show a lack of preferred orientation, while those in the schist often haye a very pronounced orientation. THE TORROWANGEE SERIES The existence of 2 thick sequence of glacial and fluvio-glacial sediments on the northern and north-eastern extension of the Barrier Ranges was first reported by Mawson (1912). These rocks which overlie the Willyama complex with violent unconformity he termed the Torrowangee Series, and from their characteristic lithology they have been correlated with the Sturtian Series of the Adelaide System of South Australia (Mawson 1949). The Torrensian Series of the Adelaide region is here absent, and coarse houlder beds or sometimes massive quartzite or silicified tillite mark the beginning of the Later Precambrian sedimentation, The following stratigraphic succession is given by King and Thomson; 1. Claystone with massive coarse-grained quartzite, 2. Cleaved shales or claystones with tillite horizons. 128 3. Limestone lenses in calcareous shales with minor glacial erratics. 4. Flagey sandstone and laminated shales with minor glacial erratics. 5. Tillite and glacial boulder heds, with massive quartzite and conglomerate close ta the base of the series in a nuntber of places, This paper is only concerned with the basal formation. The siliceous bed, which forms the base of the Torrowatigee Series in much af the Barrier Range region (Basal quartzite of Mawson and Andrews) is under- lain by a considerable thickness of glactgene sediments in the yicinity of Brewery Well, The thickness of sediment below this “basal quartzite” is probably. of the order of 2,000 feel, although the lens-like nature of the beds and complicated folding makes an accurate determination difficult, These underlying beds are formed by overlapping deposition, possibly in a glacial valley during the early stages of glaciation. (2) LatHotocy In the urea under investigation the “basal quartzite” horizon is répresented by arenacteous tillite which often contains large numbers of siliccous blue-grey quartzite erratics and interbedded grits. As the underlying beds decrease in thick- ness this horizon become silicified and produces in places a dense quartzite tillite which consists essentially of boulders of quartzite in a quartzite matrix. Although intercalated stratified lenses of greywacke (grits) and slate occut, the beds are in general completely unsorted, The size range is extreme, varying from the finest rock flour up to boulders 12 feet across. Angular, sub-angular and sometimes faceted boulders are present, but the majority of the coarser detritus ig comparatively well rounded. This is in conformity with the well-rounded material forming the terminal moraines of some present-day glaciet's. Pressure grooving in the form of sub-parallel markings is occasionally seen on the surface of boulders, but none which could be accepted as genuine glacial striae were found. However, Mawson [personal communication) reports glacial striae on a pebble found near Yanco Glen. Many of the boulders are of local origin, particularly in the beds lying stratigraphically helow the “basal quartzite’ horizon. These include most of the ruck types occurring in the nearby Willyama complex, namely chiastolite phyllite, Hecked and handed metasiltstones, fine-grained quartz-mica schists, pegmatites, and most abundant of all fine, medium and coarse-grained granites. A number of these gramite boulders were sectioned and examined under the microscope. They were seen to be identical with the locally occtirring granite, thus giving evidence in support of a pre-Torrowangee age for its intrusion. Boulders foreign to the area (truce erratics) are less abundant in the lower beds, but become more important higher up in the series. Of these a dense blue-grey quartzite is the must conspicuous. lt is considered that the lowest heds are the result of the action of local land ice; this explains the abundance of boulders of the immediately underlying rock, Higher up in the series, where the beds become more continuous, it is probable that deposition took place ynder water. The base of the Torrowangee Series in the area studied, cotisists far the most pact of coarse boulder beds locally sheared but not sSilicified as is general along the Yanco Glen—Paps line. Occasionally a band of arkosic grit, normally only a few feet thick, can be seen resting on the Willyama schist. Perhaps the most interesting basal rock is that seen resting directly on the eroded surface of the Brewery Creck granite. This rock has been termed a “granite illite’ as it consists almost entirely of granite boulders in an arkasic thatrix, pl OX, fig. 3). The unweathered rock (9682) is pale grey in colour and typically ansorted. Angular, suh-angular and rounded fragments showing great L2o variation in size are set in a pale grey base of fine rock flour, Most of the larger fragments ate of grantte and many of the smaller individual and composite grains of quartz and felspar have been derived from the grinding up of the tnder- lying granite, Fragments of fine-grained slaty and chert-like rocks of the Willyama complex are present but less abundant. Because of the preponderance of granitic material the weathered surface of the rock, as seen outcropping in the field, shows a marked resemblance to the adjacent granite, In thin section the unsorted nature of the rock is most apparent. Angular and sub-angular fragments yaty in size down to minute particles (pl, IX, fig. +). Fragments of granite contain quattz, microcline, plagioclase, muscovite and tourmaline, Quartz is the most abundant of the individual grains and this often shows the thin hair-like rods which are common in the quartz of the local granites, Felspar fragments consist of both microcline and albite. Small angular grains of tourmaline and scattered throughout the rock, while detrital flakes of muscovite are rare. The fine-grained base contains smaller particles of the uiaturial which forms the larger fragments together with abundant sericite which has been derived from the decomposition of Felspar. Tillite occurring near the unconformity in the vicinity of Brewery Well differs from the granite-tillite just described in (hai the majority of the rock frag- ments have been derived from the Willyama metasediments, mainly fine-grained metasiltstone. Tt is noticeable that the lithology of the tillites in most of the area varies sympathetically with the nature of the underlying parent rock. This is particularly evident with the “granite-tillite’ and the tillite consisting predominantly of fine- grained metasiltstone, Another variation is what may be termed a “slate-tillite,”” This rock consists mainly of slate fragments together with subordinate frag- ments uf granite and quartz. The platy phenoclasts of dark grey slate have a common orientation which is probably due to their tabular nature at the time of deposition, This gives the rock a sheared appearance, unlike the adjacent tillite in which the phenoclasts are equidimensional. This sympathetic variation of lillite with the underlying rock has been observed elsewhere in the Barrier Ranges. Kenny (1954, p. 43) described an “augen gneiss” tillite outcropping on the Euriowié road some 12 miles due east of Poolamacca. He says, “Here the tillite is composed entirely of angular fragments of augen-gneiss so closely set that very little matrix is visible to the naked eye. On first sight the rock has the general appearance of a mass of augen-gneiss, but close study reveals the irregular and conflicting alignment of the folia in the gneissic fragments,” Andrews (1922, p. 65) described a tillite rich in quartz magnetite boulders From the Sisters locality near Broken Hill. He also pointed out that “granite waste cemented with tillite material’ occurs at the unconformity near Poolamacea homestead. Above these basal beds are subaqueous glacigene sediments similar to those of the Sturtian Series of South Australia. These consist of interbedded and lens-like occurrences of tillites, greywacke type grits, washed arkoste grits, slates and shales. The glacigene sediments interbedded with the massive tillites occur as small discontinuous beds normally only a foot or so in thickness, which lens out over a distance rarely more than two or three hundred yards, The most abundant of these intercalated sediments are arenaceous types which show all graduations from well-washed quartzites to arkosic grits and greywackes, Some of these arenaceous beds display cross bedding structures, while the more typical grey- watke types show graded bedding or merely alternations of coarser and finer material. The shales are always grey in colour and vary from normal argillites tq calcareous and arenaceous types, Many are banded and finely laminated, 130 Sporadie bouldets and pebbles indicative of the presence of floating ice are common, One isolated bed of butt-coloured impure limestone about owe foot wide was traced in the field for 150 yards, Below the “basal quartzite” horizon the lens-like character is very pronounced, The thin-hedded glacigene sediments often Finger out into masses of structureless Lillite which must have been heaps of glacial moraine on the depositional surface. The occurrence of this massive tillite in the noses of many of the minor fold structures seems more than coincidental and possibly these masses of coarse detritus have exerted soine structural control, {b) MeramorpHism oF ToRROWANGEE SEDIMENTS Within the area studied the regional metamorphism of the Torrowangee rocks has not been preat, and does not exceed the muscovite-chlorite subfacies. Dynamic metamorphism along the unconformity has in places produced a catatlastic schist from the tillite, in which elongate boulders may he seen. This grades into the older Willyama schists through a zone of metamorphic con- vergence which may be up to three yards in width but is usually quite arrow. At (he unconformity near its north-castern extrentity there is a gradation from sheared tillite, through tillite schist, to schist which cannot be differentiated tram the Willyama schist, Apart from the low grade regional and dynamic metamorphism which has probably accompanied the folding, the Torrowangee sediments are unaltered. No evidence of post-Torrowangee igneous activity has been found, but quartz veins upto a foot or so wide and several hundred feet long commonly [follow the axial plant direction, Occasional quartz blows of larger dimensions are seen. STRUCTURE (a) Tae Wittyama Rocas To the south of Brewery Well the Willyama rocks arc metasediments in which the original sedimentary bedding is still well preserved. These heds occupy a position on the eastern limb of a south-pitching syncline, with dips generally very steep and in places vertical or overturned. Phinge indicated by drag folds, is ahowt 50° to the south. Puckering of the less competent Heds oectrs in the noses of folds with simultaneous shattering of interbedded siliceous rocks. To the east of these low grade metasediments the dynamic metamorphisin gradually increases and the alder racks in the eastern portion of the arca appear to have been the locus of intense shearing movements, The foliation of the coarser-grained schists occurring here trends north-south and is usually vertical but in places it dips steeply to the east. A strong Jineation in the plane of foliation pitches south at 50° corresponding to the pitch of the structures in the low grade metasediments further west. In the area of cataclastic schists the original bedding structures have been almost obliterated, Occasionally bands of more competent siliceous rock can be seen ctitting actoss the foliation, hut they cannot be followed for any great distance in the field. An attempt has been made to plot these struc- tures from serial photographs and the trend lines thus obtained indicate much Gghter folding than in the western portion of the area. Prom the scanty field evidence it appears that these structures also plunge steeply to the south. Thin siliceous bands are often sheared out, giving boudinage structures. These at times have the appearance of quartzite hoylders in « sclistose matrix and could be mistaken. for ancient boulder beds, (b) Tee Torrowancer Rocks Within the arca studied the Torrowangee rocks show greater apparerit com- plexity of folding than is. seen in the older racks which they overlie. They occupy a position on the western limb of the Yancowinna syncline which in general is a broad open field plunging to the north at a shallow angle. (King and Thomson, i3l 1953.) The axis of this major syncline occuts some four miles to the east of the Paps (wide fig. 1), The Willyama core of the corresponding anticline to the west js seen a5 a triangular-shaped area of older rocks, with its apex directed co the north, ‘This anticlinal axis lies to the west of the Brewery Creek pluton, The axial direction of the minor folds is north-south. The north plunge varies considerably, in places being almost 60°. Axial plane cleavage, usually vertical but sometimes dipping stecply to the east, is well developed in the less competent members of the series, and in places, particularly in the lower beds, there appear to have been some shearing movements following this weakness. Faulting of the Torrowangee beds is not common, although a major fault bounds the northern side uf the Brewery Creek pluton. Here a small tongue of granite- tillite which rests unconformably on the granite has been raised into contact with normal tilites higher up in the series (vide geological map). In general the beds of the Torrowangee series appear to be infolded into the older rock, suggeat- ing that compression of the basement has heen the main cause of folding in the cover strata, This basement folding hypothesis which has recently been outlined by Lees (1952) is supported by several facts: 1, The dip of 60° of the unconformity off the Brewery Creek granite could he oe by folding of the granite itself. 2. The trend of folding in both the cover rocks and the basement rocks is north-south. 3, Folding of the basement in the eastern part of the area is more complex than in the cover strata, 4. To the south of the Brewery Creel; pluton, where the folding of Will vama appears to be more simple than that in the Torrowangee Series, there dues appedr to be some swing of the older beds in harmony with the younger beds, at the unconformity. However, the relatively simple fold structures which exist in the basement over a large part of the area, the big difference in plunge between the older and the younger rocks, and the fact that Torrowangee fold pattern is not clearly reflected on the older rocks, all suggest that other factors have contributed to the complexity of the unconformity, 1. The overlying sediments may have folded independently of the basement rocks, 2. Steep depositional dips are likely tu have occurred in the glacigene sedi- ments, patticilarly in the case of the coarser boulder beds, although no evidence of this could be found. The topography of the pre-existing land surface, especially in the vicinity wf the dynamically metamorphosed schists, is likely to have been kighly irregular and would explain the presence of many sinall inliers and outliers. 4. A small amount of folding of the basement rocks may produce com- siderable crumpling of the overlying sediments if these are confined hetween the relatively steep sides of a glacial valley. 5, Faulting in the basement rocks. may be reflected as folds in the cover strata. Upthrusting of the basement from the south along pre-existing squth--plunging’ linear weaknesses in the Willyama schist could explain the abnormal plunge in the basal beds of the Torrowangee Series. An pverihrust from the east has been mapped in the central portion of the area, 6, Different fold patterns may have developed in the Willyama and Torro- wangee rocks because of the difference in plasticity between these two distinct lithological groups, w 132 THE AGE OF THE GRANITE For many years the granite was considered to be Middle Precainbrian; how- ever, recently a post-Torrowangee age has been postulated mainly on structural evidence (King and Thomeon 1953). From a study of the Erewery Creek pluton and the adjacent Torrowangee sediments a pre-Torrowangee age is indisputable. Qn the eastern side of this pluton, contact metamorphic effects on the Torrowangee sediments are entirely lacking while Willyama rocks, oceutting as roof pendants and along the contact of the southern margin of the granite, have been slightly metamorphosed. This, coupled with the abundance of granite boulders in the basal beds of the tillite which averlies the granite, indicates that the gtanite was introduced before tillite deposition commenced. This is confirmed by outcrops in the Brewery Creck gorge in the vicinity of the Paragon mine, which is situated about a half mile beyond the north-western limit of the area mapped, Here the basal beds of the Torrowangee Series can be seen resting unconformably upon the eroded basement of granite, Near the unconformity the bedded tillite consists almost entirely of granite boulders in an arkosic matrix (wide p, 128), but this grades into normal tillite higher up in the series, At the contact between the Willyama sediments and the granite in this locality, the granite has been intruded along bedding planes, giving a distinctive type of veined tock. Boulders identical with this composite tock can he fonnd in the adjacent tilhte (pl. X, fig. 1 and 2), Although evidence points to a pre-Torrowangee age for the granite, certain exposures along the unconformity both north and south af Brewery Well and particularly in the vicinity of the slackyards, seem to contradict this. These are discontinuous outcrops of granite which occur along the uconformity itself and in two isolated cases in the tillite a foot or so above the unconf ormity plane. First impressions suggest that these are dykes. or sills which have heen intruded at a later date than the tillite fleposition. However, all the dykes and smaller masses of granite occurring in the area and the marginal facies of the Brewery Creek mass are fine in grain size, yet these occurrences now heiny considered are coarse-grained and very similar to the coarser granite occurring in the central part of the Brewery Creek phiton. After studying these outcrops in the field it is now thought that they repre- sent large boulders and blocks of granite which rested upon the original erosion Surface at the lime tillite depasition commenced. Tt is concluded that all the granite in the area studied is pre-Torrowangrce im age. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We are indebted to Mr. Nevins, of Poolamacey Station, who provided transport and accommodation while the field work was being carried ont, ancl to Messrs, King and Thomson, who were instrumental in bringing the problem before our notice. Our thanks are also duc to Dr. D. R. Howes and other members of the Department of Geology, including Professor Sir Douglas Mawson and Mr. Kleeman, for their suggestions and helpful advice. REFERENCES Annrrws, F.C. 1950 Geology of Broken Hill, N.S.W. Rept. XVIItth Tht. Geol, Cong. pt, vity The Geology, Paragenesis and Reserves of the Ores of Lead and Zinc, p. 187 Anprews, F.C, and Assacrares 1922 The Geology of the Rroken Hill Dis- trict, Mem. Geol. Surv., N.S,W,, 8 8, Plate IX i Vol, ‘02 x SJOOIN, PESSOI) “R96 NUR BY} ByUeLs JO uoNdes uy Sy ‘9g X sfoor passory ‘gytias puv zyenb Aq ayypoyseryo jo JUusuaor[dar BuiMoys aAoqe JO JaUIOD PUL, yay do} Ut UOTJIas SsO19 JO JUAUATIY[UGT z ‘Si “8X “3996 ‘ayyysyd I ‘314 ayo1s es ‘Yaad AlaMaig, JO pag UI ayy apyumeas jo aansodxy € Sq Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust., 1955 Vol. 78, Plate X Fig. 1 Granite intruded along bedding of Willvania metasedinients— Brewery Creek, Fig. 2 A boulder of rock identical with that shown above in overlying tillite— Brewery Creek. 133 Browne, W. R. 1922 Report on the Petrology of the Broken Hill Region, Excluding the Great Lode and its immediate vicinity. Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 8, 295-353 Davip, T. W. E. 1950 Geology of Australia, 2, 240. Arnold Kenny, E. J. 1934 West Darling District, Mineral Resources, 36, Department of Mines, Geol. Surv. N.S.W. Kine, Hapvon F., and Tomson, B. P. 1953 Geology of the Broken Hill Dis- trict, Fifth Empire Mining and Metallurgical Congress, Australia and New Zealand, 1, Geology of Australian Ore Deposits, 533 Jouannsen, A. 1932 A descriptive Petrology of the Igneous Rocks, 2 Lees, G. fi 1952 Foreland Folding. Geol. Soc. London, Quart. Journ., 108, -3 Lesuiz, R. B., and Warts, A. J. R. 1952 Geology of portion of the “Grand Unconformity” North of Broken Hill, N.S.W. Hons. Thesis University of Adelaide (unpublished). Mawson, D. 1912 Geological Investigations in the Broken Hill Area. Mem. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 2 Mawson, D. 1926 A Brief Resume of Present Knowledge Relating to the Igneous Rocks of South Australia. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 17 Mawson, D. 1949 The Late Precambrian Ice Age and Glacial Record of the Bibliando Dome. Journ. and Proc. Roy. Soc. N,.S.W., 82 SHaAnND, S. James 1943 Eruptive Rocks: Murby LOWER CRETACEOUS PLANT REMAINS FROM THE VICINITY OF MOUNT BABBAGE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY M. F. GLAESSNER* AND V. R. RAOF Summary A number of Lower Cretaceous plant remains from the north-eastern Flinders Ranges, from strata previously considered as Tertiary, are described. The only previously described species is placed in anew genus Nathorstianella. 134 LOWER CRETACEOUS PLANT REMAINS FROM THE VICINITY OF MOUNT BABBAGE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA By M. F. Graessner * and V, R, Raoj [Read 14 October 1954] SUMMARY A number of Lower Cretaceotis plant remains from the tiorth-easiern Flinders Ranges, from strata. previously considered as Tertiary, are described, The only previously described species is placed in a new genus Nafhorstianella. INTRODUCTION The material on which this account is based was collected by one of the authors (VY. R, R.), jointly with Mr, G. D. Woodard and Mrs. E. B. Summers, during September 1953, One specimen collected at Mount Babbage (1,011 ft., lat. 29° 54’ south, long. 139° 40’ east) by Dr. D. R. Bowes in 1950, and another collected by Miss M. J, Wade in 1950 have also been included, All specimens are in the palacontological collections of the University of Adelaide. The strati- graphy of the area is the subject of a recent paper by G. D. Woodard (1955), to which the reader is referred for a detailed description of the localities, their stratigraphic relations, and the age determination of the strata. A photograph of Mount Babbage was recently published by Bowes (1953, pl. 10, fig. 1). Previous. work on the area includes a description of plant remains by H. Woodward (1885) who determined correctly the age of the flora as Mesozoic. although insufficient material led him to erroneous identifications, Unfortunately, his paper was not known to Woolnough and David (1925) who placed the plant- bearing strata at the top of Mount Babbage in the Tertiary, using for these and other non-marine deposits of the Lake Eyre Basin the term “Eyrtan Series.” This term has since found wide application in stratigraphic literature and in map legends, though it is stil! ill-defined. At the same time Woolnough and David considered the plant-bearing boulder beds at the foot of Mount Babbaye and in the vicinity of Muloowurtina Homestead as evidence of Cretaceous glaciation. Woodard has. now shown that they are gravel and boulder beds at the hase of the Lower Cretaceous transgression. Mr. S$. B. Dickinson, Director of Mines, has informed us that he collected a. few years ago plant remains in the same area which were determined as of Mesozoic age. The results of these investigations are unpublished. SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS NATHORSTIANEL?A Nov. gen. NATHORSTIANELLA BALHAGENSIS (H. Woodward) PI. NI, fig. 1-4 1885 Mantellia babbagensis, H. Woodward, Geol. Mag., ns., (3), 2, p. 290, pl, 7, fig. t, 2. Material—Six stem fragments of vatying lengths (30-180 imin.); a ster fragment with root-beating base but without rootlets; one conical fragment, possibly of a young stem hase. * University of Adelaide. } Geological Survey of India. 138 Preservation—Casts in quartzite, without organic substance, The quartzite ig the alteration product of sandstones which ts widespread on old erosion surfaces in Central Australia and which is part of the ‘duricrust’ described by Woolnough, Lecality—Top of Munnt Babbage (1,01! ft.) Northern Flinders Ranges, South Australia. Hoalotype—A.U.G.D. No. PF, 15070 (pl. XI, fig. la, b). Description—The root-bearing base measuring about 55 mm, in diameter and 18 mm. high, is divided into lobes by four radial grooves arranged in two opposing paits which are joined by a short straight groove. The angles at its ends are less than 90°, those formed on either side of it by the radial grooves are more than 90°. This arrangement corresponds to that scet in the stem base of Plewrawvia in which the surface layers are not preserved (Magdefrau 1931, fig. 2). In this genus, according ta Magdefrau, a crevice extends downward almost to the external surface of the stem base. This explains ihe appearance of the grooves on the surface of the present specimen. The central groove also corresponds to the “split” in the “stock” of the living [sectes. As in Plewrameia, the surface of the stem base is covered with rootlet scars. They measute about 2 min. in diameter and are mostly preserved as ring-shaped depressions. In the best-preserved scars the depression is horseshoe-shaped, enclosing a slightly eccentric elevation, as in Plewromeia and Nathorstiana. No appendages have been fotind. Tike sears are closely spaced, without any visible regularity in their arrangement. The outline of the base is angular; with the grooves ending at the angles which du not project. The lower surface of the stem base is convex hetween the grooves but one of these areas has been flattened, apparently in the course of embedding or fossilization, and partly broken radially. Its inargin now projects outward, giving the base a roughly pentagonal outline. The peripheral margin of the hase is rounded in lateral view. Above it, the stem base slopes inwurd for a short distance and then grades into the stem, A conical fragment (pl. X1, fig: 4), about 38 mm. in diameter and 20 mm, high, may represent a young growth stage of the stem base, Its surface shows a projecting ring 27 mmm. in diameter but no rootlet scars. The stem is conical, sloping (i a large fragment without base, pl. XT, fiz. 2) from a diameter of 71 mm. to 40 mm, over a length of 180 nun. This is the largest fragment found to date. It shows expanded rings about 10-20 mm. distant, while inore closely spaced rings and also wider bulbous expansions are seen in other fragments. The surface of the stem is densely covered with minute leaf scars, which are 1-3 mm, long, very low and transversely elongate (slit-like). No details of the structure of these scirs are preserved in the coarse matrix, Their atrangement is spiral and the spacing is such that the impression of both low- ingled and high-augled spirals is created. Neither leaves nor cones have been jound. Comparison—A stem fragment ciosely resembling the largest specimen in the present collection was described from the same Incality by H. Woodward (1885), as follows: “On the exterior a thin carbonaceous crust, most of which is now removed, renders more prominent a fine network of extremely minute compressed elliptical or lozenge-shaped acars, indicating the bases of the petioles; 6 of these scars measure only 20 mm, in breadth, and 9 scars oceupy the same space in height. The diameter wf the stem is 5 centimetres, The fragment is, I haye no doubt, a portion of the stem of a plant which has been closely covered with leaves, such as we find in some Monocotyledonons plants like “Blackhoys” and “Grass trees" (Xanthorrhace and Kingia) of Aus- 136 tralia, or perhaps still more like those Cycadeae whose stems are covered with the permanent bases of the Icaves. [ have compared this specimen with the figures of Muntlellig inelusa, Carr, given by Mr. Carruthers im his memoir on “Fossil Cycadean Stems from the Secondary Rocks of Britain (Trans. Linn, Sec. Lon., 26, 1868, 703, tab. Ixiii, fig. Z, 3)...” "OF course but little can be said in the way of detailed description of so fragmentary a fossil remain; nevertheless, from the comparison I have made, I am inclined to consider this fossil to belong ta the Cycadeas and perhaps to the genus Mantellia, If it be desirable, for convenience of reference, to give it a specific name, I would suggest M. Babbegeisis as its trivial name, after the locality from whence it was derived.” It is noted that the genus Mantellia Brongniart 1828 was considered by Seward (1917, p. 365) a synottym of Cycadecidea Buckland 1827. Although Woodward correctly described the appearance of the stems of this plaut, he was misled by its superficial resemblance to a eycad trunk, The dis- covery Gf the root-bearing base has made it clear that its relations are with Noathorstiana (Richter 1909, Magdefrau 1932, 1953) and Pleuromwia, and there- fore with the Lepidophytales and the living Family Isoetacecae, This Family is linked morphologically and phylogenetically, as many authors and more recerttly particularly Richter and Magdefrau have pointed out, through these two Mesozoic genera with the Palaeozoic Tepidodendrons and Sigillarias. The toot-hearing stem base of Pleuromeia and Nathorstiina is essentially a reduced Stipmaria. Tn the Australian form it differs from that of Pleuromeia in the almost complete absence of the expanded and upturned Iobe-like cxpansiona at the ends of the granyes, These “horns” are here represented only by the four corners of the base, so that the slightly inflated areas between them begin tu resemble the lobes of the “stock” of /soetes, The stem base of the fossil plant from Mott Babbage differs from Nathorstiana in the relatively much reduced length (height) and in the distinctly fuat-lobed basal surface. Equally important differences from both genera are found in the leaf-bearing stem. It is much shorter than in Piewromeja but longer than in Nethorstiand; the leaf seurs are much smaller and more closely spaced than in Pleuromeia but apparently more distinet than in Nathorstiena, The Australian species is therefore jn all observable characters distinct from and intermediate between Pleuromeia and Nathorstiana, and has to be placed in a new genus, Genus Nathorstianella nov. Type species N, habbayeusis (H, Woodward) Pescription—A genus of the Isoetaceae with a short root-bearing stem base which js closely and irregularly covered with rootlet scars and divided into four lobes by deep grooves; its outline does not project at the outer ends of these grooves, The leaf-bearing stem is long and tapering, with annular expansions, and bears numerous very stall transversely clongate and closely spaced leaf sears. Relations—It is possible, although it cannot be proved, that fyactites elequars Walkom, from fine-grained clayey sandstones underlying the Cretaceous green- sands at Gingin, Western Australia, belongs to this genus. This species was based by Walkom on a group of leaves and sporangia, The arrangement of leaves in the lype specimen (Walkom, 1944, pl. 1, fig. 1) stiggests that they were attached to a stem abotst 40 mn. in diameter; their bases were 3-4 mim. wide. These tneasurements agree with those of the stem and the leaf sears in Nathorstianella. Further discoveries, either of stems in Western Australia ar oi leaves ot, Mount Babbage, must be awaited helore this suggested relation can be tested. It would be of great interest as the sporangia in Nathorstiana am] Nalhorsiianella. are not known. The validity of the new generic name would not be affected by it as the 137 genus Jsoefites Minster 1842 was based on an “imperfectly preserved and indeterminable fossil” (Seward, 1910, p. 67) and none of the other species placed in this genys resembles the Western Australian species; two of them are described by Walkom as “very different,” while [soetites chaffati (Saporta) was based on “small relatively broad tuberous hodies reaching a breadth of 1 cm,” (Seward, 1910, p. 67) and basal portions of sporophylls. There is no reference to 3 stem. The discovery of this new genus confirms the view that a line of evolution leads from the Lower Triassic Pleuromeia which is known from Etirope, East Asia and Australia, through Nathorsfiana (known only from the Lower Cre- taccous of Germany), to /soetes. It helps to bridge the gap between the twa extinct genera, Nathorstianella shows a reduction of the lobes of Pieuromeia, but this does not go as far as in Nathorstione; on the other hand, the new genus does not show the lengthening of the root-bearing base associated with a shorten- ing of the leaf-bearing stem which is clearly shown in the German Cretaceous farm (see Magdefrau 1932, fig. 2, and 1953, fig. 240), and which becomes cankasire in Isoetes where the “stem” has disappeared in the “stock? (Lang 1915). Age—The age of Nathorstianella does not differ significantly from that of Natkorstiana which is Barremian. The Blythesdale sandstone containing these fossils in its upper part which forms the top of Mount Babbage, is directly overlain 4 miles eastward by the fossiliferous marine Roma Formation of Aptian age (Woodard 1955). Ecology—Magdefrau (1953) has made it probable that Nethorstiana lived in coastal sand dunes. Nathorstianella was found in some abundance in coarse sandy deposits, and although these fossils have not been observed in positions of growth it seems likely that they are either im situ or at least that they have not been transported far. The sand in which they are embedded is derived from locally outcropping Precambrian quartzites and appears to have heen deposited by streams or in lakes. Their sandy banks provided the habitat of Nathorstsanella, CLaperuiLesis Brongniart 1848 CLADOPHLERIS auSTRALIS (Morris) P). XII, fig. 12, 13 1917 Cladophlebis australis (Morris), Walkom, Old. Geol, Surv. Publ., 257, p: 3 pl. 5, fig. 1, 2. 1919 Cladophlebis australis (Morris), Arber, Palaeont, Bull. Geol. Surv. N.Z.. G, p. 29, pl. 4, fig, 1, 5, 8. Frond bipinnate, pinnae obliquely disposed on a slender rachis, attached ta the rachis by the whole base, oblong, apex rounded, midrib well defined, extend- lug to the apex, secondary veins make an acute angle with the midrib, margin entire, pirnae wide apart, four pinnae seen in the specimen, Measurements of the pinna—Length = 5 mm. Width = 2+5 to 3 mm, Localtt—The figured specimen was collected fram an outcrop about 2 miles north-east of Flinders No. 5 talc mine, situated about 10 miles west of Mount Babbage (sce Bowes 1953, fig. 2), In another specimen from the Woolshed sec- tiow the pinnae are longer and closer to each other, TAENioprerrs Brongniart 1828 TAENIOPTERIS SPATULATA McClelland Pl. XII, fig. 1-7 1908 “Taentopteris spatulata aud its varieties.” Chapman, Ree. Geol, Surv. Viet.. 2, pt. 4. p, 205, pls. 36, 37- 138 1917 Taeniopteris daintreei McCoy, Arber, Palaeont. Bull. 6 Geol. Surv., N.Z., p. 46, pl. 6, fig. 5. 1917 Taeniopteris spatulata McClelland, Walkom, Old. Geol. Surv. Pulb, 257, p. 30, pl. 5, fig. 2b. 1919 Taeniopteris spotulata McClelland, Walkom, Old. Geol. Surv, Publ, 264, p. 36, pl. 1, fig. 9. Frond linear, spatulate in shape, margins roughly parallel, midrib pro- ininent, veins almost at right angles to the midrib, simple, extending from the midrib to the lateral margins, closely packed, about 12 to 16 in 5 mm., apex bluntly pointed or rounded, width of the lamina decreases gradually towards the petiole, Great variation is observed in the length and width of the frond and the width of the midrib in the 12 specimens studied. The veins are clearly visible on the impressions in sandstone, while they are obscure or absent on the impres- siotis in quartzite, Measnrements—Length = 40 to 100 mm., width im the middle of the flamina = 3 to 10 mm., width of the midrib = 0:5 to 2 min. Locality—All the impressions in quartzite are collected from the flat-topped hill about 4 mile north-east of Mount Babbage and those in sandstones from the Woalshed section, Muloowurtina. Orozamitrs Braun 1842 OTOZAMITES KENGALENSIS (Oldham and Mortis) Pi. XII, fig, 14 1863 Palaeozamia bengalensis, Oldham and Morns, Palaeont, Indica, Ser. 2. 1, pt. 1, p. 27, pl. 19, fig. 1, 2, 6. 1917 Otuguimites bengalensis (Oldham and Morris), Seward, Fossil Plants, 3, p. 543, fig, 607. Frond narrow and long, pinnae short, rhomboidal, slightly rounded and produced at their basal upper margin towards the narrower end, rectangular with parallel edges and rounded apices towards the broader end, arranged alternately on the rachis, closely spaced, attached to the rachis by the whole base in a slightly oblique direction, venation obscure, rachis deep and broad. Measurements—Length of the frond = 50 mm. Width of the frond: narrower end — 4 mm., broader end = 6 mm. Pinna, narrower end: length — 2 mm., width = 2 mm: broader end: length 3 —=m., width = 1°5 mm. Locality—Only one specimen was collected from flat topped hill north-east of Mount Babbage. Cycapites Sternberg 1833 CYCADITES sp. Pl. XII, fig. 9 cf. 1917 Cycadites sp., Arber, Palacont. Bull. Geol’ Surv., NZ, 6, p. SI, fix. 10, Specimen. not well preserved, frond bipinnate, pinnae narrow and linear, gradually tapering towards the apex, attached to the rachis by the whole base, midrib paired, rachis broad and deep with roughly circular depressions, pinnae preserved only on one side of the rachis. Measurements of the largest pinna—Length = 25 mm.: width (near the base) = 5 mm.; (near the apex) == 2 mm. Width of the rachis = 3 mm. Locality—Woolshed section, Muloowurtina. 138 Nizssonia Brongniart 1824 NILSSONIA SCHAUMBURGENSIS (Dunker) Pl. XU, fig. & 1895 Nilssonia schawmburygensis (Dunker), Seward, Wealden Flora, U, p. 53, fig. 3. 1917 Nilssonia schaumburgensis (?) (Dunker), Walkom, Qld. Geol. Surv. Publ, 263, p. 33, pl. 1, fig. 14, 15. Frond moderately long and broad, segmented, truncated segments of unequal length and width, margin irregular with incisions of varying length in the middle of the frond but wavy and gradually becoming entire towards the petiole and the apex. Veins simple, parallel, 12 to 14 in 5 mm., roughly at tight angles to the midrib, extending from the midrib to the lateral margims without bifurca- tion. The margin of the segments in the middle of the lamina is slightly notched. Apex bluntly pomted. Midrib broad, showing fine ribs tunning from the petiole to the apex, This specimen closely resembles Nilssonia elegans Arber (Arber 1917, p. 52, pl. 8, fig. 8). Edwards (1934, p. 98) points out that there is practically no difference between the Wealden N. schaumburgensis (Dunker) and N. elegans Ather of New Zealand and remarks: “. . . but with only a few incomplete specimens for comparison it is safer to allow N. elegans to stand for the present.” Measurement of the frond—Length = 60 mm. Maximum width (middle of the frond) = 10 mm, Maxiniim width of the midrib = 1°5 mm. Locality—Woolshed section, Muloowurtina (collected by Miss M. J. Wade). Exatociapus Halle 1913 ELATOcLADUS PLANUS {Feistmantel) Pi. XIT, fig. 10, 11 1919 Llatecledus planus (Feistmantel), Walkom, Qld. Geol. Surv., Publ, 263, p, 43, pl 2, fig. 4, 5. 1934 Alatocladus plana (Yeistmantel), Edwards, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 10, 13, p. 103, pl. 5, fig. 3 Shoot with slender tachis showing two ranked spirally attached leaves, leaves linear, almost of uniform width, apex bluntly pointed, attached to the rachis by the whole base. The specimens are found in quartzite and no further details of the leayes are visible. Measurements of the leaves—length = 15-30 mm.; width = 1-2 mm, Locality—Flat-topped hill, north-east of Mount Babbage. CONIFEROUS WOOD Many well-preserved fossilized tree trunks are found in the Blythesdale Sandstone about 2£ miles south of Muloowurtina Homestead. The tree trunks vary in length from 7 to 36 feet, and in diameter from 1 to 4 feet. Some of the specimens collected show well-marked growth rings. A preliminary examination of the thin sections indicates that the wood is of coniferous nature. Impressions of woody structures are also seen in the quartzites of Mount Babbage and the flat-topped hills north-east of if. AFFINITIES OF THE FLORA With the exception of Nathorstianella all the other forms described here are commonly found in the late Mesozoic floras of many parts of the world. Even though: it is difficult to determine the affinities of this flora on so Few forms, it can be said that it has a close relationship with the Cretaceaus floras of Queensland, particularly with the flora of the Burrum series (Walkom 1919, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1955 Vol, 78, Plate XJ Nathorstianella babbagensis (FI. Woodward) Fig. La, b—Root-bearing base; a, basal view, natural size: 1 b, lateral view, x 0+9, Holotype F.15075. Fig. 2, 3—Siem fragments, x 0-75, F.15076, F 15077. Fie, 4— Conical fragment, possibly stem base, x 1-4, F. 15078. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1955 | : Fig. 1-4—Tueniopteris spatullata McClelland. Impressions on quartzite, natural size. F. 15079 a, F.15079 b, F. 15080, F.1508L. Fig. 5-7—T. spatitluta McClelland. Impres- sions on sandstones showing veins, fig. 5, x 2+5, fig. 6 and 7, natural size. F, 15082 to F. 15084. Fig. 8—Nilssonia cf. schawnburgensis (Dunker) x 1+2. F. 15085. Fig. 9— Cycadites sp. natural size, F, 15086. Fig. 10, 11—latocladus planus (Feistmantel) rittural size. F, 15087, F.15088. Fig. 12, 13—Cladophlebis australis (Morris). Fig. 12, x2, Fig. 13, same, x4. F. 15089. Fig. 14—Otosamites bengulensis (Oldham and Morris), natural size, F, 15090, Vol, 78, Plate XII NOAM ! ~ © Tuils 140 1919b), Some of these forms are also described from the Jurassic and Cretaceous of New Zealand (Arber 1917 and Edwards 1934), The field evidence (Woodard 1955) supports the Lower Cretaceoits age of this flora. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The authors are indebted to Professor T. G. B. Osborn for an instructive discussion of the morphology of the living /soetes and for helpful comment and criticism. The field investigations were assisted by a grant from the General Research Funds of the University of Adelaide. The junior author cartied out his work during his tenure of a Commonwealth Technical Assistance (Colombo Plat) Fellowship at the University of Adelaide. REFERENCES Arner, N. E. A. 1917 The earlier Mesozoic Floras of New Zealand. Geol. Surv, N.Z, Palaeont. Bull. No. 6 Epwarps, W. N. 1934 Jurassic Plants from New Zealatid, Ann, Mag, Nat. Hist., Ser. 10, 13, pp, 81-108 Bowrs, D, R, 1953 The genesis of some granitic and associated rocks in the north-eastern Flinders Ranges, South Australia, Trans. Roy, Soe. S. Aust., 76, 85-107 Lane, W, H. 1915 Studies on the morphology of Isoetes, I. The general morphology of the stock of Jsaetes lacustris. Mem. Proc. Manchester Lit. Phil. Soc., 59, No, 3, pp. 1-28 (reprint) MAcnerrau, K. 1931 Zur Morphologie und phylogenetischen Bedeutung der fossilen Pflanzengattung Pleurometa. Beih. z. Bot. Centrulbl., 48, Abt. IT, pp. 119-140 MA&Gperrav, K. 1932 Ueber Nathorstiana, eine Isoetacee aus dem Neokom yon Quedlinburg a. Harz, Beih. z. Bot, Centralbl., 49, Abt. II, pp. 706- 718 MAcperrau, K. 1953 Palaeobiologie der Pflanzen. 2nd ed. Ricutrr, P. B. 1909 Beitrige zur Flora der unteren Kreide Quedlinburgs, T. Il, Leipzig Sewarn, A. C. 1910 Fossil Plants, 2 Sewarp, A. C. 1917 Fossil Plants, 3 Watxom, A. B. 1919a Mesozoic Floras of Queensland. Parts 3 and 4, Old. Geol, Surv. Publ. 263 Wacxom, A, B, 1919b Queensland Fossil Floras, Proc. Roy. Soc, Old., 31, No. 1 Warxom, A. B. 1944 Fossil plants from Gingin, W. Aust. J. Roy. Soc. W. Aust., 28, 201-207 Wooparp, G. D, 1955 The stratigraphic succession in the vicinity of Mount Babbage, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 78 Woopwarp, H. 1885 Notes on some Mesozoic plant remains from South Aus- tralia. Geol. Mag., N.S., (3), 2, 289-293 Wootnoven, W. G,, and Davin, T. W. E. 1926 Cretaceous glaciation in Cen- tral Australia, Quart. J. Geol. Soc. Lond, 82, pt. 3, 332-351 ACANTHOCEPHALA COLLECTED BY THE AUSTRALIAN NATIONAL ANTARCTIC RESEARCH EXPEDITION ON HEARD ISLAND AND MACQUARIE ISLAND DURING 1948-50 BY S. J. EDMONDS* Summary Three Acanthocephala are recorded from the sub-Antarctic Islands: Aspersentis austrinus van Cleave, Corynosoma bullosum (von Linstow) and Corynosoma clavatum Gosse. Corynosoma sp. is also recorded from a penguin. 141 ACANTHOCEPHALA COLLECTED BY THE AUSTRALIAN NATIONAL ANTARCTIC RESEARCH EXPEDITION ON HEARD ISLAND AND MACQUARIE ISLAND DURING 1948-50 By S$. J. Epmonps * [Read 14 October 1954] SUMMARY Three Acanthocephala are recorded from the sub-Antarctic Islands: Aspersentis austrinus van Cleave, Corynosonia bullosum (vou Latstow) and Coryrosoma clavatim Gosse. Coryno- soma sp. is also recorded from a penguin, INTRODUCTION Most of the Acanthocephala described in this report were collected by R. G. Chittleborough and E. H. M. Ealey while stationed with the A.N,A,R.E. at Heard Island during 1949, Two species were collected by N. M. Ilaysom at Macquarie Island in the same year. LIST OF PARASITES EXAMINED ARRANGED ACCORDING TO THEIR HOSTS Fisx NoTroTHENTA coriicers Richatdsou—Aspersentis austrinus van Cleave, 1929, and structure in both sexes is 0:25 mm. and occurs toward its posterior extremity. larval form of Corynosoma bullosum (von Linstow, 1892), Heard Island. NotToTHENIA CYANOBRANCHA Richardson— Aspersentis austvinus van Cleave, 1929, Heard Island. Birps PHALACROCORAX ATRICEPS NIVALIS Falla Corynosoma clavatum Gosse, 1940, Heard Island, Pyeosceris Papua Forster—Corynosoma sp., Macquarie Island. MAMMALS MigouncaA LEONINA Linn.—Corynosoma bullosum (von Linstow, 1892), Heard and Macqtiarie Islands. Hyprurca Lerronyx (de Blainville)—Corynosoma bullosum {von Linstow, 1892), Heard Island. DESCRIPTION OF PARASITES ASPERSENTIS AUSTRINUS van Cleave, 1929 Fig. 1 Heard Island—Catalogue number of collections 233, 426, 428, 428, 488, 489, About 30 specimens of this parasite, most of which are females, were found in the intestine of the fish, Nofothenia corticeps and N. cyanobrancha. The length of the body or trunk of the males excluding the proboscis is 4-4-5°] mm., and of the females 6°4-9-2 mm. The maximum width of the males is 1:2 mm., and of the females 2°2 mm. Two females which had contracted very much in length and whose shape seemed abnormally rounded were 3°3 mm. wide. The length of the proboscis, which when when fully extended is curved ventrally to a slight extent, lies between 0°75 and 0-85 mm. The minimum width of the There is an unarmed neck up to 0°3 mm. long. The proboscis is armed with 14 rows of 9-11 hooks per row and the hooks on its ventral surface are largest. * University of Adelaide. 14z The maximum length of the proboscis sheath is 1-3 mm. The body wall is thick and the anterial ventral surface of the worm is atmed with body spines. The lemnisei are a little longer than the proboscis sheath. The testes are oval in shape and of approximately equal size; their maximum length is 0°75-0-90 mm. and width 0-44-60 mm. Six cement glands are present and their ducts remain separate almost to the base of Saefftigen’s pouch, The uterus is as much as 2°6 mm. long, and it some cases much distendel with eggs; its maximum width is 0:32 mm. Ripe eggs are 78-85» long an 18-25, wide and possess polar prolongations. Fout smailer specimens of 4. austrinus were obtained from {he intestine of Nolothenia cyanobrancha. The four worms consisted of two males and two females, In two specimens the praboscis was extended sufficiently to make identi- fication possible, Aspersents austrinus was described by van Cleave (1929) from “Tremo- tomus or Notothenia” from South Georgia. Rhadinorhynchus wheeleri Baylis 1929 from Notothena rasstt seems to be synonymous with .4, austrinys, CorvNoOsOMA CLAVATUM Gosse, 1940 Fig. 2 Ieard Island—Catalogue number of collection 201. Two male and five female specimens of this parasite were found in the ftestme of the shag, Phalacrocoraax atriceps, The wortns are small and their shape resembles that of a pipe with a large bowl. In none of the specimens was the probsocis fully everted, and in all cases it had sunk below the rim of the bowl. The length of the parasites measured from the most anterior point of thie howl in a straight line to the genital aperture is in the case of the males 2°1-2-3 mm. and of the females 2+3-2-7 mm. The maximum width or diameter of the cirewlar bowl or disc of the males is 1-5 mm. and the females 16 mm. The introvert, consisting of an armed and small unarmed portion, would he about O'8 mm. long when fully extended; its maximum width about 0-3 aim. The proboscis is armed with 16 longitudinal rows of hooks. The exact number of hooks in each row has not been determined with certainty. It is estimated that there would he 10-11. The posteriar four hooks of each row ate smallest and the fifth or sixth hook of each row is the largest. The size and shape of the largest hook is shown in fig, 2. The proboscis sheath is double walled and its maximum length is 1-0 mum. The anterior region of the parasite, the dise or bowl, bears numerous rows of small spines about 284 long, The remainder of the hady is devoid of spines, except the genital region which bears a few very small spines, The genital spines are particularly noticeable in the two male speciinens. Eges 73-76y long and 32-36 wide were present in two of the females, C. clavatunt has how been reported [rom a number of shays in the southern hemisphere; by Gosse (1940) from Phalacrocovax alter, P. snclunaleuca and P. varius, and by Johnston and Best (1942) from P. varius, The larval farm (19 i reported from the fish, Platycephalus fuscus, by Johnston and Edmonds CorYNOSOMA BULLOSUM (corn Linstow, 1892) Fig, 3.5 Heard Island—Catalogue number of collections 144, 218, 219, 304, 361, 426, 427. 428, 470, 483, 503. Macquarie Island—M1/49/P7, Anutt Form A very good collection consisting of over 100 specimens in an excellent state of preservation were obtained from the intestine of the sea elephant, 143 Mirounga leonina, Two specimens were also found in material collected from the intestine of the sea leopard, Hydrurga leptonyx. Most of the specimens were yellow to orange in colour. The maximum length (excluding the proboscis) of the males is 6'°2 mm., and of the females 12°2 mm.; the maximum width (in the anterior region) of the males is 1°6 mm., and of the female 1:9 mm. The proboscis is cylindrical in shape and 0-94-1-10 mm. Jong, Its maximum width is about 0°26 mm. It is armed with 15-16 longitudinal rows of 11-13 hooks per rom. Except for the posterior 3 or 4 there is little differentiation in their size and shape (fig. 3). mw 6.6 ———__» orlmm Fis. 1—Aspersentis austrvinus. Adult male. Fig. 2—Corynosoma clavatum. Largest proboscis hook. Fig. 3-5—-Corynosoma bullosum. Fig. 3, proboscis hooks; fig. 4, adult male; fig. 5, proboscis There is an unatmed neck as long as 0-4 mm. The proboscis sheath is double walled ; its maximum length is 1:°4 mm.,, and width 0°30 mm, An elliptical ganglion is present near the middle of the sheath. The anterior swollen portion of the body and the genital region of both sexes bears small spines. Two oval-shaped testes of approximately equal size lie in most specimens at about the same level; their maximum length is 0°7-0‘9 mm., and width 0-32-0'45 mm. There are six long tubular cement glands arranged in pairs. The testes and cement glands are placed in most specimens so as to make the male bilaterally symmetrical. Two vasa deferentia unite about the level of Saefftigen’s idg pouch. There is a well developed bursa everted in a number of specimens and bearing about 20 rays. The female system consisting of a bell, uterus and vagina is as much as 3-5 mm. long. The vaginal complex consists of three bulbs. The posterior region of a number of females forms an introvort up to 0-5 mm. long. Ripe eggs with polar prolongations of the middle shell are 93-105 long and 20-26, wide. C. bullosum has been reported previously (Meyer 1932) from M. leonina, Larval, Form Some specimens consisting of 14 cysts, 3 larvae emerging from cysts and 2 freed larvae, collected from the mesentery of Notethenia coriiceps, have been identihed as C. bullosum, The cysts are oval to kidney-shaped and white in colour. Their maximum length is 1-6-2-0 mm., and width 0:7-0:9 mm. The identification is based on an examination of the emerging and freed laryae. The two larvae which had lost their cyst cases are females. The length of their bady measured from the base of the proboscis to the genital aperture is 3-5-3-7 mm. The maximum width of the anterior swollen body region is 1-2-1-4 mm. The proboscis, 0-90-0°96 mm. long and about 0-26 mm. wide, bears 16 longitudinal rows of hooks, each row consisting of 13 hooks. The anterior portion of the body and the region surrounding the genital aperture bear small spines. The larval form of C. bullosum has been recorded from the peritoneum of Chaenocephalus aceratus by Baylis (1929). CoryNosoMA sp. Macquarie Island. M1/49/P33. Four immature acanthocephala were obtained from the intestine of the penguin, Pygoscelis papua, The proboscis of none of the specimens is fully extended and the reproductive organs are in the early stages of development, The anterior swollen portion of the body and the ventral surface of the parasites bear small spines. The genital aperture is surrounded with very small spines. Identification, however, will have to be withheld until more material is available for examination. REFERENCES Bayurs, H. A. 1929 Parasitic Nematoda and Acanthocephala in the Discovery Reports, 1, 541-559 Gossz, O. M. 1940 Platyhelminth and Acanthocephalan parasites of local shags. Jour, Roy. Soc W. Aust., 24, 1-14 Jounston, T. H. and Best, E. W. 1942 Australian Acanthocephala, No. 3. Trans. Roy. Soc. of S, Aust., 66, 250-254 jJounston, T. H., and Epmonns, S. J. 1952 Australian Acanthocephala, No. 9. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 75, 16-21 Meyer, A. 1932 Acanthocephala in Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen des Tier- reichs, Bd, TV, 2 Abt., 2 Buch, 76-83 van Creve, H. J. 1929 A new Genus and new Species of Acanthocephala from the Antarctic. Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 10, IV, 229-231 SOME OBSERVATIONS ON THE BIOLOGY, INCLUDING MATING AND OTHER BEHAVIOUR, OF THE AUSTRALIAN SCORPION URODACUS ABRUPTUS POCOCK BY R, V. SOUTHCOTT Summary Two species of scorpion of the genus Urodacus Peters 1861 are recorded from the Adelaide region of South Australia. These are referred to U. armatus Pocock 1888 and U. abruptus Pocock 1888. The different habitats of these two species are described. Observations on the behaviour of specimens of U. abruptus kept in captivity are recorded. This species has been observed to perform a mating procedure not previously described in the scorpions. After the typical stance of the promenade a deux is adopted the male has been observed to make a series of lunges or thrusts, in which he pushes himself through the "arms" or pedipalpi of the female. These, acts appear to be an effort to turn the female backwards, upon her back, prior to copulation. Actual copulation was not observed. Adults of this species of scorpion have been kept in captivity up to 22 months. A supposedly parturient female of U. abruptus was observed, on very hot days in summer, to adopt an elevated stance, with the abdomen hyper-extended on the cephalothorax, with the telson drooping forwards. A similar, but less marked, attitude has also been observed in males of this species, under hot humid conditions. The purpose of this attitude is uncertain, but probably it has a respiratory and perhaps cooling function. 145 SOME OBSERVATIONS ON THE BIOLOGY, INCLUDING MATING AND OTHER BEHAVIOUR, OF THE AUSTRALIAN SCORPION URODACUS ABRUPTUS POCOCK By R, V- SourTuacorr [Read 14 October 1954] SUMMARY Two species of scorpion of the genus Urodacus Peters 1861 are recorded from the Adelaide region of South Australia. These are referred to U. armatus Pocock 1888 and LU. abruptus Pecock 1888. The different habitats of these two species are described, Observa- tions on the behaviour of specimens of U. abruptus kept in captivity are recorded. This species has been observed to perform a mating procedure not previously described in_ the scorpions. After the typical stance of the promenade 4 deux is adopted the male has been observed to make a series of lunges of thrusts, in which he pushes himself through the “arms” or pedipalpi of the female. These, acts appear to be un effort to turn the female back- wards, upon her back, prior to copulation. Actual copulation was not observed. Adults of this species of scorpion have been kept in captivity up to 22 months, A supposedly parturient female of U. abruptus was observed, on very holt days in summer, to adopt afi elevated stance, with the abdomen hyper-extended on the cephalothorax, with the telson drooping forwards, A similar, but less marked, attitude has also been observed in males of this species, :mder hot humid conditions. The purpose of this attitude is uncertain, hut probably it has a respiratory and perhaps cooling function. INTRODUCTION The genus Urodacus Peters 1861 is confined to Australia, some 15 species being recognized. Two species of this genus occur in the vicinity of Adelaide, South Australia. The smaller darker species is the subject of the present paper, atid will be referred to Urodacus abruptus Pocock 1888.‘ Te lives in shallow tunnels in loamy soil, chiefly under stones, and is not uncommon in the Mount Lofty Ranges, The larger species is less common, It is lighter in colour, brown, and excavates tunnels in sand or sandy soils, these tunnels opening free to the surface: It will be referred to U. armafus Pocock 1888, described originally from a male specimen from Port Lincoln, South Australia. RECORDED DISTRIBUTION OF U. ABRUPTUS Urodacus atruptus Pocock 1888 was described from two females in the collection of the British Museum—'one ticketed Adelaide, the other merely New Tfolland.” tn 1893 Pocock referred again to this species, describing the male and stating, “This species seems to be common in South and South-east Australia. The type of the species (a dried specimen) came from Adelaide; but since it was described I have seen others in the Museum of Owens College, Manchester, ¥) In the present paper I have followed the classification of Pocock (1888, 1893, 1898, 1902) rather than that of Kraepelin (1899, 1908, and earlier papers). The latter author regarded U. novaekellundiog Peters 1861 and U. abruptus Pocock 1888 as conspecific with Toctonus manicates Thorell 1876. Although Kraepelin stated that he had come to this opinion after a study of Thorell’s otiginal specimens, there are so many gross discrepancies between Thorell’s brief description and any Urodacus of which T am aware, that I consider it extremely unlikely that Kraepelin had Thorell's original specimens (from “Nova Hollandia") before him. Numerotis errors by Kraepelin m both observation and interpretation are pointed out by Pocock (1891, 1898, 1902). Unfortunately it does not uppear likely that Thorell's types can be recovered {Vachon 1954, personal communication) .Both species in the Adelaide tegion correspond to Pocock’s descriptions for U, abruptus and U, armatus respectively. The systematics of the gentis U/rodacus will be considered further in later papers. 146 which are: ticketed Mount Lofty, South Australia, and Victoria.” In 1898 Pocock reviewed the genus Urodacus. For U. abruptus he gave as localities “South and South eastern Australia, Adelaide, type (59.52); Ballarat and Bendigo, in Victoria (W. W. Froggatt); Cooma, Bathurst, Maitland, Yass, in New South Wales (W. W. Froggatt); New England District of New South Wales (J. Macpherson), “Since I described this species the British Museum has received a very fine series of it from Mr. Froggatt and Mr. Macpherson irom the localities mentioned above.” Glauert (1925) stated that this species extends in its geographical distribu- tio from New South Wales through Victoria to South Australia, He states further: “Whether it enters Western Australia is doubtful, Kraepelin states that it occut's there, butt ] have failed to find it among the hundred or more specimens ot Urodacus which I have received from all parts of the south of Western Aus- tralia, On the other hand, the Uredacus, so plentiful in the vicinity of Eucla, is U. novae-hollandiae; this suggests that U. manicatus (U. abruptus) does not reach the western boundary of South Australia,” In the same paper Glauert recorded two specimens of this species from: Kangaroo Island, South Australia. PRESENT OBSERVATIONS ON HABITAT AND DISTRIBUTION Uredacus abruptus is found in loamy soil in-eucalypt forest, where it hives in shallow tunnels under fairly large stones, In the Mount Lofty Ranges of South Australia, where most of my field observations have heen made, it is found m fair numbers at the edge of moderately dense forest of stringybark (Eucalyptus oblique), or occasionally blue-gum (Eucalyptus leucoxylon), in preferably damp or slightly danip situations. I have also collected this species in the Grampians of Victoria, and at the western end of Kangaroo Island, South Australia. Males may readily be distinguished from the females by the former having the dorsal sutface of the abdomen dull grey, finely granular, whereas in the females the dorsal surface of the abdomen is darker, smooth and polished. The specimens of this species (captured up to November 1953) in my collee- tion are as follows: Serial Number of Nuniber Specimens Locality Comments Sus 6 Workanda Creek, National Park, TParasitized by larval Lepius sp. Belair, Mount Lofty Ranges, (nmsp.) (Acarina Erythraeidae) South Australia, 30th March, 1937 Ss 2 144 Mount Osmond (5 specimens) Kept m captivity. Some lived 2 Workanda Creck (9 specimens} months (Mount Tofty Ranges), April- May 1938 5S 4 4 Workanda Creek, 24 July 1938 Two mature; iwo juvenile 8 5 2 Waterfall Gully, Mount Lofty One adult; one immature Ranges, 24 August 1938 3S. +2 1 National Park, Belair, 11 April 1939 s } 1 Chetry Gardens, Mount Lofty Pectines removed experimentally. Ranges, 30 April 1939 Lived some weeks. Was probably given jnsufficient water S 8 3 Rocky River, Kangaroo Island, Two. adult males; one immature 29 December 1939 Ss 9 1 Workanda Creek, 5. Aust. 13 De- Mature. Lived 72 months in cape cember 1947 tivity 147 Serial Number of \ Number Specimens Locahty Comments 10 1 Fish Falls, Grampians, Victoria, Mature female 4 January 1948 S lt i» =Workanda Creek, 1 August, 1948 Dried carcase 5S 12 1 Workanda Creek, 10 October 1948 Mature. Liyed 4 months im eap- tivity S27 1 Workanda Creck, 13 November Mature, Lived 94 mols im cap- 1948 tivity S$ 13 t Workanda Creek, 22 May 1949 Mature. Lived 13 moliths in cap- tivity’ S 2+ \ Workanda Creek, 23 October 1949 Mature, Lived 6 months im cap- tivity 5 i4¢ 1 Workanda Creek, 30 July 1950 Mature. Lived 2 months in cap- tivily S$ 25 1 Workanda Creek, 21 May, 1950 Mature. Lived 6 months jh can- tivity: 5 26 t Workanda Creek, 12 November Lived 2 weeks in captivity 1956 Ss 28 ! Workanda Creek, 18 February Parusitized by larval Leptus sp. 1981 (Erythraeidae), Acarina S 15-18 6 Workanda Creek, July September, Sexual activity noted, See detailed 19 ALB October 1951 report helow S 20,21 3 Workanda Créek, 16 November 5§ 21 (female), lived 2 months. 1952 S 20 (male), still alive (Sepiem- ber 1954), ie., has lived 22. months in captivity S 22,23 2 Workanda Creek, 30 August 1953 8S 43 6 Workunda Creek, 1 November Three specimens are still in cap- 1953 tivity. Four mature, 2, immature REARING EXPERIMENTS It will be noted from the above data that since 1937 a number of attempts has been made to keep scorpions in captivity, So far it has been possible to keep adults alive up to 22 mionths im captivity. Since 1947 T have kept them in cylindrical glass pots, with overlapping (not sealed) lids. These pots are 15 cms. across by 10 cms. high and contain a little damp sol. Various insects and spiders have been given for food. So far no insect or arachnid that I have given them has been refused. I have fed them on nsoths, spiders, flies, beetles, etc. Generally moths or beefles are the most conyenient, Of the beetles I generally give various species of Carabidae, e.g. Clivina sp., etc., oF else Adelium sp. (Tenebrionidae). The scorpions appear to be able to distinguish an insect’s (etc.) movement from that of another scorpion; as long as the insect moves. at moderate speed the scorpion immediately seizes it, unless it is bloated with fond or else the weather cold. The scorpions invariably sting their prey to subdue it as soon as it 1s cap- tured, often stinging it twice in different sites before the struggles cease. If one scorpion walks over another, as often happens in the confined space af the pot, it is very rare for any evidence of resentment to be aroused. Skirmishes between these scorpions are rare, Tn its manner of stinging its prey immediately on cap- ture Urodacus abrupius differs markedly from the large Philippine forest scorpion (Palamnaeus longimanus Herbst?) as described by Schultze. Schultze (1927) recorded that he had never seen this latter scorpion sting its prey—e.g., cock- raaches—in order to subdue it. The prey was held clear of the ground, and eaten while still struggling, Schultze stated that “I believe that the poisonous stinger is used only as a defensive weapon against its enemies.” In its habit of stinging ts prey in order to subdue it Urodacus abruptus resembles Buthus occitanus, as recorded by Fabre, rather than Schultze's species, 1438 Urodacus abruptis can survive a considerable time without food, 1 have kept an adult male specimen in captivity for eight months without food, after which period it was given a housefly to eat. Since then it has heen kept a further nine months without fond, and remains at the time of writing (September 1954) active and plump, apparently quite healthy, When a group of scorpions is kept in captivity, even if both sexes are present, they generally live amicably, How- ever, If food is not given they occasionally practise cannibalism. These scorpions are inactive by day, but become active at night, On inspecting the pot one morn- ing one may find that one scorpion has disappeared, and a plump. catinibal ig finishing off the last of its fellow. I have not actually seen the beginning of such 4 meal, 50 am unable to say what circumstances precipitate it, or whether the sting is used in such an encounter, but in view of the general feeding habits of this scorpiun it appears probable that it is. In such acts of cannibalism it is always one of the smaller specimens that succumtbs. Usually the meal is altnost over by the time it is discovered, I make a practice of counting 1p the number of scorpions in the pot at each observation, Usually the ony bare of the vanquished that remain after such a meal are the pedipalpal claws (hands) and the vesiculus, with perhaps a few segments of the tail and the pedipalps, and part of the dorsal surface of the eephalothorax. The remainder disappears completely. When small heetles are given as food only the hardest parts of the insect remain after the meal, ¢.g., the elytra and the exoskeleton of the thorax, Moths and spiders disappear completely, except the scales of the former. With moths the scorpion frequently commences to eat at the head, At the present time I do not usually feed the scorpions oftener than once per month, Tt is probably on account of this that I haye more lately scen more frequent evidence of cannibalism. Even so, scorpions may remain in & pot far several months without feeding before one of the smaller specimens is eaten. There is no evidence that such cannibal meals commence in sexual activity, in fact, as remarked before the Victims are immature specimens. Water is needed more frequently by this species of scorpion. In the cooler months J generally give water about once per month. The floor of the pots is covered with a Jayer of earth, which, is kept Just damp. In the summer months water is given more often, usally about once per week, The water may be dropped nm to the mouth parts by a dropper, or else pledgets of cotton wool soaked in water are placed in the pot. In the latter case, when the pot has become very dry, the scorpions will cluster around the pledget almost immediately, tearing al it with their chelicerac. They frequently give the appearance of cating the water rather than drinking it, As yet parturition has not been observed in Urodacks abruptis, even though females have been observed in captivity with gross abdominal distension. Certain details of sexual behaviour have however heen observed, and will be recorded in the following section, SEXUAL BEMAVIOUR Experiment $ 15-19. On 29 July 1951 three scorpions were captured at Workanda Greek. National Pari, Belgir, South Atistralia. The two larger scor- pions were placed in a sinall “wax vesta” tin, Nothing unusual was noted at the subsequent occasional examinations, until 10 September, a warm day, when many “seuffling” noises were heard emanating from the tin. On opening the tin it was found that the pair were holding “hands” as im 2 typical promenade & deux as desctibed by Fabre. The pair were transferred to a glass pot as described abave, and that manaetvre separated them, On the morning of 11 September it was seen that the pair had resunied the promenade & dex position. No fresh observa- tions Gold be made, and on the morning of 12 September the pair had separated again, On 13 September two fresh adult scorpions from Workanda Creek were 149 added to the pot. On 14 September further evidence of sexual activity was noted ; a male had grasped a female askew, holding the passive female sideways on. On 15 September al! scorpions were separate. On 24 September I recorded: No further attempt at a promenade a deux has been observed, The scorpions do aot appear to resent in any way one of their fellows climbing over them—this applies equally well to males and females. By day they are sluggish, but when one switches on the light at night to observe them they are at the alert, poised on their legs and with the telson up, walking or stalking around, manoeuvring the pectines delicately over the crumbs and limps of soil in the pot, and demonstrating very clearly the tactile function of the pectines. On & October 1951 I recorded: No further sexual activity has been observed. The five scorpions are in the pot on my study table, and are under pretty con- stant observation. The weather is warm today and perhaps this accounts for today’s resumption of sexual activity. The soil in the pot has become rather dry. At 10.10 p.m. I noted: The couple rests for about half a minute, with fingers clasped (see fig. 1), and then the “orgasm” recommences, The male pushes the Fig. 1 Normal positied of the promenade 4 deux in the scorpion Uraducus abruptus. Male to left, Note the more erect telson of the male, that of the female being setmi-ercct. female against the glass side of the pot and wags his tail up and down in seem- ing attempts to climb through her “arms” and push his genital operculum against her mouthparts. The pectines move aboul scemingly to serve as tactile organs. His mouthparts work at the same time, the chelicerae heing extended. His first legs are planted on her chelicerae, but she makes no effort at resistance or counter- movement. He then pulls her backwards. The frenzy then starts again, the male's tail works vigorously, and at the next attempt he manages to climb further, in fact almost right through her arms (10,15 p.m.) (see fig. 2). One arm of the male then disengages, the male circles rapidly around, still retaining the grip of his other pendipalp (fig 3) until he faces the female again. The process then starts all over again. In the extreme position of the sexual lunge the pedipalpi of the female are twisted back behind the cephalothorax, and completely extended, so that the suriace of the pedipalpi that is normally ventral faces dorsally and anteriorly {fig. 2), The mouthparts of the female remain quite impassive, and she remains no more than placidly co-operative during the whole of the process. 10.30 p.m.; The male nibbles at the female with one chelicera and then the other in quick succession, or with both simultaneously, at either her cephalo- thorax or the claws of her pedipalpi. Whilst doing this the male brandishes his 150 tail erect, and waves it about freely as though to heigtiten the “orgasm.” The tail of the female remains flaccid, curled, usually rest on the soil, or else slightly raised, but it is never raised at more than 45° above the horizontal. 10.35 p.m,: The activity continues almost unceasingly. In one manoeuvre the male grasped the female by her wrong (contralateral) claw. The male soon corrected this. The female appears willing to go wherever the male will push or pull her. 10.37 p.m.: The male grabs the female's tail with one of his pedipalps and leads her around by it, pulling her tail over her cephalothorax, At this insult she opens. her claws a little, but makes no effort to attack or resist the male, and she soon desists. The male soon after gets tangled up, grabbing any- where at the female, but after some manoeuvring resumes the standard face to face position, again holding the female's pedipalpal “fingers” between his. Again the male attempts to climb through the female’s “atms" on to her back, as in fig. 2. \, Fig, 2 The sexual thrust, im which the male forces himself through the pedipali of the female. The full depth of the thrust has not yet been reached, 10.41 p.m.: While attempting to climb through the female's “arms’ the male nearly succeeded in pulling her over on to her back, using the hind end of her abdomen (mesosoma) as a pivot. Her cephalothorax was hifted clear of the ground, and sharply retroflexed upon her abdotnen, The pair then returned to the standard face to face position (as in fig. 1), and the furious “kissings’’ and lunges started over again, __ 10.50 p.m.: An attempt was made at photography.. The excessively bright lights necessary caused a cessation of sexual activity, which was never resumed. OTHER BEHAVIOUR These notes continue the narrative of the above group of specimens, 9 October 1951: Weather cooler. No further activity, 16 October; One female has died (not the one of the mating pair) from no apparent cause, Water was given. The surviving scorpions drank grecdily. On 27 October a further large female scorpion from Workanda Creek was added to the pot. By 25 November 1951 this female had died, for nu apparent reason, and was removed from the pot. Water was given to the others, in the 151 form of a cotton-wool pledget soaked in water. The scorpions drank greedily, tearing at the cotton-wool with their chelicerae, On 16 Decembet a spider was added as food. This was soon eaten by one of the scorpions. On 18 December it was observed that in the preceding two days one scorpion had been eaten by one of its fellows, and only the claws of the pedipalpi remained of the victim. On 21 and 29 December insects were given and were promptly eaten. On 21 January 1951 all three scorpions appeared healthy. A moth was added to the pot. A male scorpion seized this immediately, stung it twice within a few seconds, and made off with it. But in doing so the male aroused the interest of a large female scorpion, which seized the moth from the male and carried it off. The male attempted two or three times to retricye his meal from the female, but without success. The thwarted male attempted to pick a fight with the other male in the pot, but the latter maintained his dormant attitude and would not fight. Although stings were fourished in these encounters no scorpion actually used its sting on any other. Fig. 3 The position shortly after the completion of the sexual thrust. The male has lost the gup with the left pedipalp, and is circling to resume the normal statice of the promenade a deux. On 22 January 1952 a tented piece of bark was dropped into the pot. The female immediately retired into the cavity beneath this. On 21 March 1952 or shortly before this female died, Two males remained in the pot. These were fed and watered about once per month. On 16 October 1952 one of the males died. The other male remained healthy. On 19 September 1952 a freslily captured adult female had been added to the pot. No sexual activity was observed between these scorpions, Nothing unusual was observed for the remainder of the year. Food and water were given occasionally, and were always accepted. 152 On 23 January 1953 the female commenced to adopt a stance which had not been observed previously. My notes record: Female appears parturient, judging by the size of the abdomen, She elevates the posterior end of the abdomen, with the tail drooping forward (see fig, +). She remains thus for an hour or so at a time, and then slumps to a flaccid heap on the soil. No attempt has been made to molest the male, or vice versa. On 25 January she resumed the same position (as fig, 4) from noon until nearly 4 p.m. She remained flaccid on the soil until 6 p.nt, then resumed the fig. 4 stance for three hours, after which she disappeared under the tented piece of hark. At 10 p.m. she emerged again. This stance of elevation of the abdomen was resumed periodically but only on very hot days, and after 25 February 1953 was not ubserved. When she assumed her position she would climb on a piece of hark or a lump of soil in an apparent attempt to get as much elevation as possible, On 31 March 1953 the female (S18) died. By 13 Apri} 1953 or shartly before the male (S IYA) died, COMMENT ON ‘THE SEXUAL. BEHAVIOUR I have net been able to find any record of the sexual lunges described above for Uredacus abruptus in the published descriptions of mating behaviour of scorpions, Millot and Vachon (1949), in an excellent review of the existing knowledge, state: “We owe the essential part of eur knowledge to Fabre, in his Souvenirs Entomologiques ... - On a single occasion he was able to catch a glimpse of (‘entrevoir') the solution of the difficult problem of fertilization: the male, lifting his belly, slides wnder the female, the pectines interdigitating. the hands still constantly gripped. Well hefore Fabre, Maceary, in September 1809, had seen a niale, after some initial failures, attack the ‘forehead’ of the female, turn her ayer on her hack, and remain about five minutes upon her, In 1891 Brongniart and Gaubert reported that Marés. tn Algeria, had surprised coupled scorpions, belly to belly, the pectines interdigitating,” Millot and Vachon then proceed to disctiss the mechanism of fertilization. It is possible that the sexual lunges or thrtists recorded above for Urodacus abruptus were seen by Maccary in his “vaines tentatives (préludes),” for the Languedacian scorpion (Buthus occitenus (Amor.) ). However, no more precise record than this appears to have been made previously, The observations described above for Urodacis whruptus suggested that the male was attempting to push the female over onto her back, and in fact he nearly suceecded in doing this on one occasion during the observations, Tt is expected that in copulation the animals remain belly to belly, chelicerae to chelicerae, tail to tail, the male on top. The failure for actual coptilation to occur may have Leen due to (1) disturbance from the bright lights in the attempts at photo- graphy; (2) inadequate facilities for the male lo exert pressure on the Female in his attempt to turn her on to her back, It is expected that in mature copulation normally occurs in the shallow tunnels in which these scorpions live. In such tunnels it would be possible for the male to exert considerable ferce with his legs bracerl against the sides. On the relatively flat earth surfaces in the rearing jars the male’s legs were quite extended during the moments of maximal pressure in the sexual thrusts, and obviously the male was at the limits to which he could force himself. The writer has since constructed an artificial tunnel of clear plastic, coming off a box of the same composition (“Perspex”). Some vertical scratches line the tirmel to aid the male in his bracing. It is hoped that the restricted space of this tunnel will provide stritable conditions for copulation to occur and be observed. As our scanty knowledge on this subject world indicate, opportunities to observe these phenomena. are few and fleeting. J ie} ‘SL Way if} UT snfpditago 1o3 prumny Jopun “Ja.utuns IDPOAS) O[PILDT e ur Laas UOTBAD|O Jeulluopd? out b Su 153 It will be noted that in the mating dance of Urodacus abruptus the fcmale keeps her tail comparatively flaccid—her tail is either loosely coiled behind her, semi-erect, or else lies flaccidly horizontal on th soil, loosely coiled. In this characteristic U, abruptus differs from other scorpions whose mating dances have been described, ¢.g, Buthus occitanus (see Fabre 1923), or Buthotus alficela (see Serfaty and Vachon 1950). In both of these latter species the female takes a slightly more actiye part in the mating dance, and in them the tail is descrihed as femaining erect. in both sexes. It is of interest to note the “kissings’ in U. abreptws—in which the male nibbles harmlessly at the ‘‘face,"” etc., of the female with his chelicerae. Since scorpions are but little changed in structure since Silurian times, it may reason- ably be surmised that this. and other sexual behaviour described extends back to a geological period of great antiquity, COMMENT ON THE ABDOMINAL ELEVATION Tt was at first thought that the clevation of the rear part of the pregnant female was indicative of imminent parturition. As however perturition did not ensue in the female described this surmise was rendered less likely, Schultze oan ) observed parturition in one fernale of the large Philippine forest scorpion Palammacus longwmanus Herbst?) recording that in this process it “held its body in a peculiar positioti, somewhat raised and bent or curved in the middle into 3 cotivex shape but with the chelipeds drawn up close to the body.” This fatter position is unlike the one described above for U. abruptus, 1 have observed males also of U, abruptus to adopt a similar attitude, on hot days in December 1953, when conditions in the pot were hot and humid, However in the male the attitude was less pronounced than in the female. It would appear most likely therefore that the stance described is an effort to lift the stigmata free from the humid layer of air and soil, when the scorpion's metabolism is increased by a hot environment. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I am greatly indebted to Dr. Max Vachon, of the Muséum National d'Hist- cire Naturelle, Paris, for advice and encouragement. The illustrations to this article were prepared by his artist, M. Gaillard, from sketches and specimens forwarded by myself (Specimens S2 and $9, fram Mount Osmond, South Aus- tralia, and Workanda Creek National Park, Belair, South Australia). REFERENCES Rroneniarr, C., and Gaunert, P. 1891 Fonctions de lorgane pectiniforime des Scerpions, C, R. Acad. Se., Paris, Tame 113, 1062 Parre, J. H. 1923 Souvenirs Entomologiques, 9e. Série, Edit. définitive, Dela- grave, Paris Fasre, J. H. 1923 The Life of the Scorpion. Translated by Alexander Termeira de Mattos, Hodder & Stoughton, London Giavert, L. 1925 The Flora and Fauna of Nuyts Archipetigo and the Investi- gator Group. No. 17—The Scorpions, with descriptions of some Species rg poihes localities in South Australia. Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Arist, 49, Kearretin, K. 1899 Scorpions und Pedipalpi, Das Tierreich, Lf. 8, 1-265 Kraeretix, K, 1908 Scorpions ta Die Fauna Stidwest-Australiens, 2, 87, Jena Maccary, A. 1810 Mémoire sur le Scorpion qui se trouve stir la Montagne de ee Paris, Gabon Edit., 48 pp. (quoted in Millot and Vachon Mtttor, J., and Vachon, M. 1949 Ordre des Scorpions, in Traité de Zoo- ee, “natouite, Systématique, Biologie, Edited by P,-P. Grassé, Tome 154 Pocock, R. I. 1888 The Species of the Genus Urodacus contained in_ the Collection of the British (Natural-History) Museum. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 6th Series, 2, 169 Pocock, R. I. 1891 Notes on Some Scorpions collected by Mr. J. J. Walker, with descriptions of two new Species and a new Genus, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 6th Series, 8, 241 Pocock, R. I. 1893 Notes on the Classification of Scorpions, followed by some observations upon Synonomy, with descriptions of new Genera and Species. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 6th Series, 12, 303 Pocock, R. I. 1898 The Australian Scorpions of the Genus Uredacus, Pet. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 7th Series, 2, 59 Pocock, R. I. 1902 A contribution to the Systematics of Scorpions. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 7th Series, 10, 364 ScuvuttzE, W. 1927 Biology of the large Philippine Forest Scorpion. Philip, J. Se., 32, 375 Serraty, A., and Vacnon, M. 1950 Quelques Remarques sur la Biologie d’un Scorpion de Afghanistan: Buthotus alticola (Pocock). Bull. Mus. Nat. Hist. Nat., Paris 2e Série, 22, (2), 215 Tuorert, T. 1876 On the Classification of Scorpions. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 4th Series, 17, 1 VacHon, M. 1954 Personal communication A NEW SPECIES OF ATRIPLEX (ATRIPLEX SPONGITVALVIS AELLEN) BY PAUL AELLEN (BASLE) Summary Atriplex spongiivalvis Aellen spec. nov. Frutex 30 cm. altus valde lignescens multiramosus; surculi juveniles dense lepidoti demum glabrescentes. Folia superiors parva, 5 mm. longa, 4 mm. lata, ovatorhombica, utrinque 1-3-dentata, antice late cartilagineo-mucronata, basi rotundata vel cuneata, sessilia vel breviter subpetiolata, consistentia crasse coriacea, imprimis subtus dense lepidota. Flores masculi et feminei mixti 1-3-ni (omnino) axillares sessiles, dense lepidoti. Perianthium florum femineorum 2.5 mm. longum, 2 mm. latum, obovato-rotundatum, antice latissimum, ibique dentibus 3 (-5) obtusis vel acutis prolongatis provisum, dente intermedio laterales superante, in parte inferiore magis spongioso-incrassatum, in medio continue gibberoso-coronatum, gibberibus 3-5 obtusis vel acutiusculis leviter arcuatim dispositis, non tubulosum, sessile ad 2/3 connatum. Pericarpium tenuiter membranaceum. Semen atrofusum, oblongum, | mm. ad summum diametro. Stigmata minuta, sessilia. Radicula embryonis lateraliter ascendens. 155 A NEW SPECIES OF ATRIPLEX (ATRIPLEX SPONGIIVALVIS AELLEN) By Paut AELLEN (Basle) (Communicated by C. M. Eardley) [Read 14 October 1954] Atriplex spongiivalvis Aellen spec. nov. Frutex 30cm. altus valde lignescens multiramosus; surculi juveniles dense lepi- doti demum glabrescerites. Folia superiora parva, 5 mm, longa, 4 mm. lata, ovato- rhombica, utrinque 1-3-dentata, antice late cartilagineo-mucronata, bast rotundata vel cuneata, sessilia vel breviter subpetiolata, consistentia crasse coriacea, imprimis subttis dense lepidota. Flores masculi et feminei mixti 1-3-ni (omnino) axillares sessiles, dense lepidoti, Perianthium florum fetnineorum 2-5 mm. longum, 2 mm. latum, obovato-rotundatum, antice latissimum, thique dentibus 3 (—5) obtusis vel acutis prolongatis provisum, dente intermedio laterales superante, in parte inferiore magis spongioso-incrassattum, in medio continue gibberoso-coronatum, gibberibus 3-5 obtusis vel acutiusculis leviter arcuatim dispositis, non tubulosum, sessile ad 2/3 connatum. Pericarpium tenuiter membranaceum. Semen atrofusum, oblongum, 1 mm. ad summutn diametro. Stigmata minuta, sessilia. Radicula embryonis lateraliter ascendens. South Australia: Eyre Peninsula—Cowell and Kimba Districts; June 1937, J.C. Gross. (Type in the Herbarium of the Waite Agricultural Research Institute and in Herbarium P. Aellen.)} Die neue Art ist zunachst yerwandt imit 4triplexr prostrata R.Br. und A- Acuti- bractea Anderson. Die beiden Artem werden jedoch als einjahrig beschrieben, wahrend 4. spongiivalvis ein stark verholzter, niederer Strauch ist. Die Perianthe von A. prostrata tragen keine Anhangsel, und die kegelformigen Hocker auf den Perianthen von A. acutibractea stehen einzeln, sind einfach oder hochstens zwei- geteilt, and sind nicht—wie bei A. spongitvaluis—kraftig und zu emem geschlos- senen Kranz gruppiert. Fig. I Fruiting bracteoles of Atriplex spongtivalvis Acllen, This new species of saltbush is most closely related to Atriplex prostrata R. Br. and A. acutibractea Anderson. These two species, however, are described as annuals, whilst <. spongiivalvis is a decidedly woody, low shrub, The fruiting bracteoles of A. prostrata bear no appendages, and the conical tubercles on the bracteoles of A. acwtibractea are isolated, being simple or at most divided into two, and are not—as in A. spongiivalvis—robust and grouped into a closed wreath, (Translation C.M.E.) THE GENETIC AND SYSTEMATIC STATUS OF EUCALYPTUS HUBERIANA NAUDIN, E. VIMINALIS LABILL. AND E. AROMAPHLOIA PRYOR AND WILLIS BY L. D. PRYOR* Summary Eucalyptus populations in western Victoria and South Australia previously often referred to E. Huberiana are considered as a result of progeny testing and careful field collecting, to be a segregating hybrid swarm between E. viminalis and E. aromaphloia. The development of this swarm may have coincided with a relatively recent arid climatic cycle. 156 THE GENETIC AND SYSTEMATIC STATUS OF EUCALYPTUS HUBERIANA NAUDIN, E. VIMINALIS LABILL. AND E, AROMAPHLOIA PRYOR AND WILLIS By |. D. Pryor * [Read 14 October 1954] SUMMARY, Eucalyptus populations in western Victoria and South Ausiralia previously often referred lo &. Huberiaha are considered as a resilt of progeny testing and careful field collecting, to be a segregating hybrid swarm between H. viminalis and EK. aramaphloia. The development of this swarm may have coincided with a relatively recent arid climatic cycle, Excalyptus Huberiana\ is a species which in common with a number of others, was described from a single planted specimen growing in Europe. In this particular case, Naudin described tt trom a tree seven years old growing at Nice, France. Naudin makes the remark that “One might take E. Huberiana for a rather slender form of E. wvminalts, but it can be easily distinguished from it by the following characteristics. Its inflorescence consists of axillary umbels rather shortly pedunculate, composed of seven very small pedicillate flowers...” In addition Naudin says, “... 1 do not know ... to what part of Australia it is native.” The description given, like that of many species described early in the history of the systematic treatment of a genus, omits some features which have later been found critical In determination, and includes others which are of little diagnostic value. In applying a name such as this therefore, to a population of Eucalyptus in its natural habitat, there are very considerable risks, and unléss chatactets are included in the description which for the particular category concerned happen to be critically distinct, there is danger of confusion in continuing to employ such names, The uncertaiity about the application of the name “Huberiane” is. shown by its varying use over a considerable period. Maiden, “Critical Revision” (3, 173) says, “It is allied to, or identical with, #. eiminalis.’ On the other hand, Blakely (1934) gives it specific rank and assigns specimens from a good many diverse localitics to it. Burbidge (1947) reduces it to HE. wiminaliy var, Huberiang, In connection with another but now discarded species name, &. Maseliana, described by Naudin, Maiden says, “If F, Mazeliana is not E, viminaliy and not F. Smith, I cannot say what it is.” The same remark might well have been inade of H. Huberiana. The description, however, is adequate to yilace £. Huberiana as having a strong affinity with EZ. viminalis, or at least, with species in Blakely's series Viminales, Tt has become the practice to refer to Z. I/uberiana, trees falling clearly within the series Viminales, which are close to E, wiminalis in many respects hut differ in having at least some flower clusters with more than three flowers, and with some rough bark varying from a relatively small amount at the butt to a large amount extending to the secondary branches. A significant thing which wall be referred to again later, is that H. Auberiana is often described as having a geographic range co-extensive with FE. viminalis. Burbidge specifically refers to this by saying, “Distribution is the same as in ZL, wiminalis.” Within the series Vimitales this is exceptional as the “good” species of the series, vis., Bauerlenii, quadvangulata, Macarthurt, Smithit and Benthamii, each ocetpy localities which which are ecologically and generally geographically distinct from £. vimninalts, and are certainly not co-extensiye with it. * Department of the Interiar, Canberra, A.C.T. } Nomenclature as in Blakely (1934), "A Key to the Eucalypts,” 137 EUCALYPTUS VIMINALIS The type of E. viminalis was desctibed by Labillardiere from a specimen taken at Cape Van Diemen, Tasmania, There is little doubt that the type, which had three-flowered inflorescences, was taken from an individual which belonged to an extensive Eucalyptus population within the Macrantherae in which the predominant characters are that the inflorescences are exclusively three-flowered, the bark is smooth and decorticating except possibly for a very small amount at the base, the juvenile leaves are opposite, sessile, not glaucous, and somewhat stem-clasping for a large number of pairs. On this basis, the population called E. viminalis makes up one of the widespread species of the genus (fig. 1), It i ! ! {—— ' | ( 1 AUSTRALIA! N Ew Soucy WALES The présent distribution of E_ wimimalis. has become the practice, in addition, to refer to this species individuals which differ in some degree from the type description. This, of course, is necessary in all systematic work because the type specimen is from a single plant which cannot be absolutely identical with the population, and therefore it becomes a matter of opinion as to whether another given individual should be referred to that species. In accordance with this, Maiden accepted the idea that individuals which differed only in having a good deal of rough bark on the main trunk might be included, and also that those with inflorescences with four and five and eyen more flowers, but otherwise similar, could be included. With regard to this latter point, however, he says, in making a comparison E. viminalis with E. Smithit (3, 180) “. . . E. Smithii is multi-flowered, while E. viminalis usually has flowers in threes, while it much less rarely has them in fours and even more, but while multi-flowered individuals may be abundant in a particular district, they are few in comparison with the total of the normal form,” 158 Emphasis is given to the two points of bark and number of flowers in the inflorescence, In both cases, but particularly in the inflorescence, the presence of flower clusters of more than three, but less ihan seven, im individuals assigned io a species which is ordinarily over a great portion of the population exclusively threc-flowered, is found invariably associated with the hybridism, A. viminalis hybridizes freely, as deduced by progeny tests, with many other species belong- ing to Blakely’s section Macrantherae (Normales), Those which have been established on this basis or on grounds of morphology are as follows — Locality of Occurrence Assessment i, vials x E. glaucescens - Tinderry Mountains - - - - PT. Munyang - - - - - M. Tingiringt - - - - - PT. x Dalrympleana ~ Lixtensively in Tasmania, Victoria and NSW. - “ - - - PT, x Hi, rubida - - Near Armidale, New England Tableland and near Cooma, Southern Tablelands - - PT. x E. macrlosa -